Sagem Network Router 4450E User Guide
SAGEM 3P@C  
Triple Play Access Concentrator  
SAGEM 3P@C  
4450E  
Next Generation DSLAM  
HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL  
Issue November 2004  
S
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 0-0 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
WARNING  
The information in this document covers a version of the system designated SAGEM 3P@C 4450E. It is subject to  
technical changes.  
The different versions of the manual will follow changes to the equipment.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 0-2 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
RECORD OF AMENDMENTS  
(Each new edition supersedes the previous edition)  
EDITION N°  
DATE  
PURPOSE OF UPDATES  
PAGES  
1
November 2004 Creation of the document  
All pages  
FOREWORD  
You have just acquired a product which has been developed using the very latest  
technologies and SAGEM SA know-how. SAGEM thanks you for your confidence in their  
products.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 0-3 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Use Guide to This Manual  
13  
Part I 16  
1. Overview of the 3P@C 4450E IP-DSLAM  
1.1. SYSTEM OVERVIEW  
1-1  
1-1  
1-1  
1-2  
1-3  
1.2. REPRESENTATIVE NETWORKING APPLICATIONS  
1.3. SYSTEM COMPOSITION  
1.4. HARDWARE FEATURES  
2. 3P@C 4450E Hardware Structure  
2.1. SHELF CONFIGURATION  
2-1  
2-1  
2-1  
2.1.1.  
2.1.2.  
2.1.3.  
2.1.4.  
Structure of the General Chassis  
10U Chassis  
2-3  
Fan Module  
2-4  
Air Deflector Frame  
2-4  
2.2. FULL CONFIGURATION OF THE CABINET  
2.3. SMUB AND SERVICE BOARDS  
2-6  
2-7  
2.3.1.  
2.3.2.  
2.3.3.  
2.3.4.  
Service Processor Unit Board (SMUB)  
VDSL Unit Board (VDUB)  
2-7  
2-10  
2-11  
2-13  
2-14  
2-14  
2-14  
2-15  
2-15  
2-17  
2-18  
2-19  
2-21  
2-22  
2-23  
ADSL Unit Board (ADUB)  
ADSL Unit Card (ADUC)  
2.4. POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM  
2.4.1.  
2.4.2.  
Overview  
Functional Features  
2.5. OPTIONAL UPLINK INTERFACE MODULES  
2.5.1.  
2.5.2.  
2.5.3.  
2.5.4.  
2.5.5.  
2.5.6.  
1-port Gigabit Long-wave Optical Interface Module (DS-1GLX)  
1-port Gigabit Short-wave Optical Interface Module (DS-1GSX)  
2-port 100M Multi-mode Optical Interface Module (DS-2FMM)  
2-port 100M Single-mode Optical Interface Module (DS-2FSM)  
4-port 100M Electrical Interface Module (DS-4TXB)  
VAS Card (DS-4ITX)  
2.6. ROUTE TRANSFER UNIT (RTU)  
3. Installation Preparation  
3-1  
3.1. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS  
3-1  
3-1  
3-1  
3-1  
3.1.1.  
3.1.2.  
3.1.3.  
Temperature and Humidity Requirements  
Cleanness Requirements  
Floor Requirements  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 0-4 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
3.1.4.  
3.1.5.  
3.1.6.  
3.1.7.  
3.1.8.  
Heat Dissipation Requirements  
Power Supply Requirements  
Grounding Requirements  
Anti-interference Requirements  
Other Requirements  
3-2  
3-2  
3-2  
3-4  
3-4  
3-5  
3-5  
3-5  
3-6  
3-6  
3-7  
3-7  
3-7  
3-7  
3-8  
3-8  
3-8  
3-9  
3-9  
3-10  
3-14  
3.2. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS  
3.2.1.  
3.2.2.  
3.2.3.  
3.2.4.  
3.2.5.  
3.2.6.  
3.2.7.  
Basic Safety Requirements  
Antistatic Requirements  
Avoiding Laser Damage  
Lightning Protection Requirements  
Anti-seismic Design Requirements  
Fireproof Design Requirements  
Precautions for Equipment Handling  
3.3. INSTALLATION TOOLS AND MATERIALS  
3.4. PRODUCT CONFIGURATION LIST  
3.4.1.  
3.4.2.  
Basic Configuration of the Product  
Optional Components  
3.5. UNPACKING FOR ACCEPTANCE  
3.5.1.  
3.5.2.  
3.5.3.  
Preparation  
Unpacking  
Goods Acceptance  
4. Equipment Installation and Connection  
4.1. CABINET INSTALLATION  
4-1  
4-1  
4.1.1.  
4.1.2.  
4.1.3.  
Installation on the Cement Floor  
Installation on the Antistatic Floor  
Installing the Cabinet Guide Rails  
4-2  
4-8  
4-14  
4-15  
4-15  
4-16  
4-19  
4-21  
4-21  
4-22  
4-22  
4-23  
4-23  
4-23  
4-25  
4.2. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT  
4.2.1.  
4.2.2.  
4.2.3.  
Installing the 10U Chassis  
Installing the Fan Module  
Installing the Air Deflector Frame  
4.3. CONNECTING THE POWER AND GROUNDING CABLES  
4.3.1.  
4.3.2.  
4.3.3.  
4.3.4.  
Connecting the Power Cables of the Equipment  
Connecting the Power Cable of the Fans  
Connecting the Grounding Cables  
Equipment Power Supply Test  
4.4. INSTALLING THE SERVICE PROCESSOR UNIT BOARD (SMUB)  
4.4.1.  
4.4.2.  
Installing the Uplink Interface Modules  
Installing the RTU  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 0-5 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
4.4.3.  
4.4.4.  
4.4.5.  
Installing the SMUB  
4-27  
4-28  
4-30  
4-31  
4-31  
4-32  
4-37  
Connecting the Ethernet Interfaces of SMUB  
Connecting the Optical Interfaces of SMUB  
4.5. INSTALLING THE SUBSCRIBER SERVICE CARDS  
4.6. INSTALLING THE DUMMY PANELS  
4.7. CONNECTING THE SUBSCRIBER CABLES  
4.8. CONNECTING THE CONSOLE CABLE  
5. Suggestions to Ethernet Cabling  
5.1. REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE TYPES  
5-1  
5-1  
5.2. REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLING LENGTH  
5-1  
5-1  
5-3  
5-4  
5-4  
5.3. SPACING REQUIREMENTS FOR INDOOR CABLING  
5.4. SEVERAL FORBIDDEN OVERHEAD CABLING METHODS  
5.5. OTHER REQUIREMENTS FOR OUTDOOR CABLING  
5.6. INSTALLING EXTERNAL LIGHTNING ARRESTER  
6. System Configuration and Management  
6.1. EQUIPMENT POWER-ON  
6-1  
6-1  
6.2. SETTING UP THE CONFIGURATION ENVIRONMENT  
6-1  
6-1  
6-3  
6-4  
6-4  
6-4  
6-5  
6-6  
6-6  
6-6  
6-7  
6-7  
6.2.1.  
6.2.2.  
Local Configuration via the Console Interface  
Remote Configuration via Telnet  
6.3. COMMAND LINE SYSTEM  
6.3.1.  
6.3.2.  
6.3.3.  
6.3.4.  
Command Mode  
Common Commands  
Online Help of Command Line  
Command Line Edit Feature  
6.4. SYSTEM MANAGEMENT  
6.4.1.  
6.4.2.  
6.4.3.  
Storage Media and File Type  
Program File Management  
Configuration File Management  
Part II  
8
7. System Maintenance  
7.1. SYSTEM UPGRADE  
7-1  
7-1  
7.1.1.  
7.1.2.  
7.1.3.  
7.1.4.  
7.1.5.  
Storage Media and File Type  
7-1  
7-1  
Sequence of System Upgrade  
Upgrading the System File  
7-1  
Upgrading the Master System Control Board  
Upgrading the Standby System Control Board  
7-10  
7-12  
7-12  
7-12  
7.2. MANAGING THE CONFIGURATION FILE  
7.2.1.  
Type and Format of Configuration File  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 0-6 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
7.2.2.  
7.2.3.  
7.2.4.  
Backuping the Configuration File  
Loading the Configuration File  
Erasing the Configuration File  
7-13  
7-14  
7-14  
7-14  
7-14  
7-15  
7-15  
7-16  
7-17  
7-17  
7-18  
7-18  
7-18  
7.3. QUERYING THE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION  
7.3.1.  
7.3.2.  
7.3.3.  
7.3.4.  
7.3.5.  
7.3.6.  
7.3.7.  
7.3.8.  
Querying the Current Software Version  
Viewing the Current Configuration  
Querying the Port Status  
Querying the VLAN Status  
Viewing FIB Table  
Viewing the ARP Table  
Viewing the Route Information  
Querying the System Running Time  
7.4. HANDLING PASSWORD LOSS  
8. Port Maintenance  
8-1  
8.1. CHECKING THE OPTICAL INTERFACE  
8-1  
8.2. CHECKING THE STATUS OF THE USER PORT  
8-2  
8-2  
8-5  
8.2.1.  
8.2.2.  
Querying the ADSL Port Status  
Querying the VDSL Port Status  
9. Card Maintenance  
9-1  
9.1. MAINTENANCE FOR SYSTEM CONTROL BOARD  
9-1  
9.1.1.  
9.1.2.  
9.1.3.  
9.1.4.  
9.1.5.  
Check  
9-1  
9-2  
9-2  
9-4  
9-4  
9-6  
9-6  
9-7  
9-8  
9-8  
Hot Plugging  
Master/Standby Switchover  
Reset  
Replacing System Control Board  
9.2. MAINTENANCE FOR SERVICE BOARD  
9.2.1.  
9.2.2.  
9.2.3.  
9.2.4.  
Check  
Hot Plugging  
Reset  
Replacing Service Board  
10.  
11.  
Power Distribution System Maintenance  
1
10.1.  
CHECKING AIR-BREAK SWITCH  
1
Line Provisioning & Maintenance  
11-1  
11.1.  
MAINTENANCE FOR AIR FILTER  
11-1  
11-1  
11-1  
11-2  
11-2  
11.1.1. Checking Air Filter  
11.1.2. Cleaning and Replacing Air Filter  
11.2.  
MAINTENANCE FOR FAN SHELF  
11.2.1. Checking Fan Shelf  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 0-7 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
11.2.2. Replacing Fan Shelf  
11-2  
12.  
Line Commissioning and Maintenance  
12-1  
12.1.  
COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE OF ADSL SUBSCRIBER LINE  
12-1  
12-1  
12.1.1. ADSL Technical Parameters  
12.1.2. ADSL Line Commissioning  
12-5  
12.1.3. ADSL Line Maintenance  
12-12  
12-17  
12-17  
12-19  
12-22  
12.2.  
COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE OF THE VDSL SUBSCRIBER LINE  
12.2.1. VDSL Technical Parameters  
12.2.2. VDSL Line Commissioning  
12.2.3. VDSL Line Maintenance  
13.  
Fault Analysis and Solution  
13-1  
13.1.  
PROBLEM LOCATION & INFORMATION COLLECTION  
13-1  
13-1  
13-1  
13-2  
13-2  
13-2  
13-2  
13-3  
13-3  
13.1.1. General Check  
13.1.2. Layer-2 Check  
13.1.3. Layer-3 Check  
13.1.4. Service Check  
13.2.  
UNSTABLE SERVICE DUE TO WRONG MAKING OF NETWORK CABLES  
13.2.1. Common Causes  
13.2.2. Processing Procedure  
13.2.3. Typical Cases  
14.  
14.1.  
Operation Instructions for the Auxiliary Devices  
14-1  
14-1  
USE OF AC/DC CONVERTER  
14-1  
Appendix  
LIST OF FIGURES  
Figure 1-1 Triple Play services in Next Generation Networks.................................................................................. 1-1  
Figure 2-1 General chassis of 3P@C 4450E ........................................................................................................... 2-1  
Figure 2-2 Rear view of the general chassis of 3P@C 4450E................................................................................. 2-2  
Figure 2-3 Front view of the 10U chassis................................................................................................................. 2-3  
Figure 2-4 Slots for the SMUB and service boards .................................................................................................. 2-3  
Figure 2-5 Front view of the fan module................................................................................................................... 2-4  
Figure 2-6 Outside view of the radiator fans............................................................................................................. 2-4  
Figure 2-7 Sectional view of the air deflector frame................................................................................................. 2-4  
Figure 2-8 Heat dissipation of a single system......................................................................................................... 2-5  
Figure 2-9 Air ducts inside the cabinet ..................................................................................................................... 2-5  
Figure 2-10 Full configuration of 3P@C 4450E........................................................................................................ 2-6  
Figure 2-11 Slots of the SMUB................................................................................................................................. 2-7  
Figure 2-12 Front view of the SMUB ........................................................................................................................ 2-8  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 0-8 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 2-13 Slots of the VDUB ............................................................................................................................... 2-10  
Figure 2-14 Front view of the VDSL ....................................................................................................................... 2-10  
Figure 2-15 Slots of the ADUB ............................................................................................................................... 2-12  
Figure 2-16 Front view of the ADUB....................................................................................................................... 2-12  
Figure 2-17 Slots of the ADUC ............................................................................................................................... 2-13  
Figure 2-18 Front view of the ADUC....................................................................................................................... 2-13  
Figure 2-19 Connection relations............................................................................................................................ 2-14  
Figure 2-20 Front view of the DS-1GLX module .................................................................................................... 2-16  
Figure 2-21 Front view of the DS-1GSX module.................................................................................................... 2-17  
Figure 2-22 Front view of the DS-2FMM module ................................................................................................... 2-18  
Figure 2-23 Front view of the DS-2FSM module.................................................................................................... 2-20  
Figure 2-24 Front view of the DS-4TXB module..................................................................................................... 2-21  
Figure 2-25 Front view of the DS-4ITX module...................................................................................................... 2-22  
Figure 3-1 Recommended power sockets................................................................................................................ 3-3  
Figure 3-2 Appearance of the packing box............................................................................................................. 3-10  
Figure 3-3 Packing structure of the equipment inside the packing box.................................................................. 3-11  
Figure 3-4 Appearance of the cabinet packing box................................................................................................ 3-12  
Figure 3-5 Draw out the packing box backward from the reverse direction........................................................... 3-13  
Figure 4-1 Cabinet installation flow chart ................................................................................................................. 4-1  
Figure 4-2 Equipment installation space .................................................................................................................. 4-2  
Figure 4-3 Flow of cabinet installation on the cement floor...................................................................................... 4-3  
Figure 4-4 Mounting hole positions for a single cabinet........................................................................................... 4-4  
Figure 4-5 Mounting hole positions for two cabinets ................................................................................................ 4-4  
Figure 4-6 Installation sequence of the pressure plate assembly............................................................................ 4-6  
Figure 4-7 Completion of the installation of a single cabinet.................................................................................... 4-6  
Figure 4-8 The connecting boards before combining two cabinets side by side...................................................... 4-7  
Figure 4-9 The connecting boards after combining two cabinets side by side......................................................... 4-7  
Figure 4-10 Effect after the installation of two combined cabinets........................................................................... 4-7  
Figure 4-11 Appearance of the A600 series support................................................................................................ 4-8  
Figure 4-12 Completion of the installation of a single cabinet.................................................................................. 4-9  
Figure 4-13 Flow of the cabinet installation on the antistatic floor............................................................................ 4-9  
Figure 4-14 Cabinet marking template ................................................................................................................... 4-10  
Figure 4-15 Connection positions of the mounting holes for the support and the antistatic floor .......................... 4-11  
Figure 4-16 Assembly chart of the pressure plate assembly ................................................................................. 4-12  
Figure 4-17 Positions of the bolts to be fastened ................................................................................................... 4-13  
Figure 4-18 Completion of the installation of two combined cabinets .................................................................... 4-14  
Figure 4-19 Guide rail............................................................................................................................................. 4-15  
Figure 4-20 Front view of the guide rails installed.................................................................................................. 4-15  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 0-9 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 4-21 Fixing the hangers onto the 10U chassis............................................................................................ 4-16  
Figure 4-22 Insert the 10U chassis into the rack and fix it ..................................................................................... 4-16  
Figure 4-23 Install the fan supports........................................................................................................................ 4-17  
Figure 4-24 Install the fan module .......................................................................................................................... 4-17  
Figure 4-25 Operate the puller adapter .................................................................................................................. 4-18  
Figure 4-26 Install the air deflector frame............................................................................................................... 4-19  
Figure 4-27 Completion of the installation of a single general chassis .................................................................. 4-20  
Figure 4-28 Installation of the -48V DC power cables............................................................................................ 4-21  
Figure 4-29 Power cable connection of the fans .................................................................................................... 4-22  
Figure 4-30 Panel view of the SUMB...................................................................................................................... 4-23  
Figure 4-31 Insert the pins of the uplink interface module into the socket of the SMUB........................................ 4-24  
Figure 4-32 Fix the uplink interface module with screws........................................................................................ 4-25  
Figure 4-33 Installation position of the RTU ........................................................................................................... 4-25  
Figure 4-34 Insert the pins of the RTU into the socket of the SMUB ..................................................................... 4-26  
Figure 4-35 Fix the RTU with screws...................................................................................................................... 4-26  
Figure 4-36 Rear view of the RTU installed with screws and nuts......................................................................... 4-27  
Figure 4-37 Installation of the SMUB...................................................................................................................... 4-27  
Figure 4-38 RJ-45 connector.................................................................................................................................. 4-28  
Figure 4-39 Illustration of making a straight-through cable .................................................................................... 4-29  
Figure 4-40 Illustration of making a crossover cable.............................................................................................. 4-29  
Figure 4-41 Ethernet interface connection of the SMUB........................................................................................ 4-30  
Figure 4-42 SC optical connector ........................................................................................................................... 4-30  
Figure 4-43 Uplink optical interface connection...................................................................................................... 4-31  
Figure 4-44 Install a dummy panel ......................................................................................................................... 4-32  
Figure 4-45 Installation of the LU and LC subscriber cables on the backplane..................................................... 4-33  
Figure 4-46 Pinouts of the LU subscriber cable ..................................................................................................... 4-33  
Figure 4-47 Pinouts of the LC telephone line ......................................................................................................... 4-34  
Figure 4-48 Cable bending and binding ................................................................................................................. 4-36  
Figure 4-49 Single binding...................................................................................................................................... 4-37  
Figure 4-50 Double binding .................................................................................................................................... 4-37  
Figure 4-51 Console interface connection.............................................................................................................. 4-38  
Figure 4-52 Input the connection name and select an icon for it............................................................................ 4-38  
Figure 4-53 Select the connecting serial port......................................................................................................... 4-39  
Figure 4-54 Communication parameter setting ...................................................................................................... 4-39  
Figure 4-55 Select the terminal emulation type...................................................................................................... 4-40  
Figure 5-1 Requirements for cabling length ............................................................................................................. 5-1  
Figure 5-2 Parallel and crossed net spacing ............................................................................................................ 5-3  
Figure 5-3 Direct overhead cabling between two buildings without any protection (1) ............................................ 5-3  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 0-10  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 5-4 Direct overhead cabling between two buildings without any protection (2) ............................................ 5-3  
Figure 5-5 Direct overhead cabling between two buildings without any protection (3) ............................................ 5-3  
Figure 5-6 Direct overhead cabling from the outdoors of the top of a buildings to the bottom floor without any  
protection........................................................................................................................................................... 5-4  
Figure 5-7 Connection of the external lightning arrester .......................................................................................... 5-4  
Figure 6-1 Remote management of 3P@C 4450E via Telnet.................................................................................. 6-3  
Figure 7-1 Connecting the console cables ............................................................................................................... 7-5  
Figure 7-2 hoosing the file to be sent ....................................................................................................................... 7-8  
Figure 7-3 File transfer interface............................................................................................................................... 7-8  
Figure 7-4 Connection mode .................................................................................................................................... 7-9  
Figure 11-1 Schematic diagram of pulled handle operation................................................................................... 11-3  
Figure 11-2 Installation of fan support.................................................................................................................... 11-4  
Figure 11-3 Installation of fan module .................................................................................................................... 11-4  
Figure 12-1 Frequency range of ADSL................................................................................................................... 12-1  
Figure 12-2 The pass-band characteristics of the ADSL voice splitter................................................................... 12-2  
Figure 12-3 ADSL distribution................................................................................................................................. 12-6  
Figure 12-4 Connection of splitters......................................................................................................................... 12-9  
Figure 12-5 VDSL frequency range...................................................................................................................... 12-17  
Figure 12-6 VDSL distribution............................................................................................................................... 12-19  
Figure 12-7 Connection of splitters....................................................................................................................... 12-21  
Figure 12-8 Networking diagram .......................................................................................................................... 12-24  
LIST OF TABLES  
Table 1-1 Boards, cards and uplink interface modules provided by 3P@C 4450E ................................................. 1-2  
Table 1-2 Name, quantity and type of the interfaces supported by 3P@C 4450E................................................... 1-3  
Table 1-3 Performance indexes of the 3P@C 4400E ............................................................................................... 1-3  
Table 2-1 General chassis composition of 3P@C 4450E ........................................................................................ 2-1  
Table 2-2 Interface features of the SMUB................................................................................................................ 2-8  
Table 2-3 Type of uplink interface modules.............................................................................................................. 2-8  
Table 2-4 Status definitions of the LED indicators on the SMUB............................................................................. 2-9  
Table 2-5 Status definitions of the LED indicators on the front panel of VDUB ..................................................... 2-11  
Table 2-6 Status definitions of the LED indicators on the front panel of ADUB ..................................................... 2-12  
Table 2-7Status definitions of the LED indicators on the front panel of ADUC...................................................... 2-14  
Table 2-8 Types of uplink interface modules.......................................................................................................... 2-15  
Table 2-9 Status definitions of the LINK and ACT LEDs on the DS-1GLX module ............................................... 2-16  
Table 2-10 Gigabit long-wave optical interface features of the DS-1GLX module................................................. 2-16  
Table 2-11 Status definitions of the LINK and ACT LEDs on the DS-1GSX module............................................. 2-17  
Table 2-12 Interface features of the DS-1GSX module.......................................................................................... 2-18  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 0-11  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Table 2-13 Status definitions of the LINK and ACT LEDs on the DS-2FMM module ............................................ 2-19  
Table 2-14 Interface features of the DS-2FMM module ......................................................................................... 2-19  
Table 2-15 Status definitions of the LINK and ACT LEDs on the DS-2FSM module............................................. 2-20  
Table 2-16 Interface features of the DS-2FSM module.......................................................................................... 2-20  
Table 2-17 Status definitions of the LINK and ACT LEDs on the DS-4TXB module............................................. 2-21  
Table 2-18 Interface features of the DS-4TXB module .......................................................................................... 2-21  
Table 2-19 Status definitions of the LINK and ACT LEDs on the DS-4ITX module............................................... 2-22  
Table 2-20 Interface features of the DS-4ITX module............................................................................................ 2-23  
Table 2-21 Structure of the RTU............................................................................................................................. 2-23  
Table 4-1 Pinouts of the RJ-45 MDI interface ........................................................................................................ 4-28  
Table 4-2 Pinouts of the RJ-45 MDIX interface...................................................................................................... 4-28  
Table 4-3 Pinouts of the LU subscriber cable......................................................................................................... 4-33  
Table 4-4 Pinouts of the LC telephone line ............................................................................................................ 4-35  
Table 5-1 Requirements of spacing between Ethernet cables and cables of other electric devices ....................... 5-2  
Table 5-2 Requirements of spacing between the Ethernet cables on the wall and other pipelines......................... 5-2  
Table 6-1 Description of the read-only mode and the configuration mode .............................................................. 6-4  
Table 6-2 Commands in the read-only mode ........................................................................................................... 6-4  
Table 6-3 Common commands in the configuration mode....................................................................................... 6-5  
Table 6-4 Line edit commands in the command line................................................................................................ 6-6  
Table 6-5 Correspondence between file types and command line parameters of 3P@C 4450E............................ 6-6  
Table 7-1 Bootrom command ................................................................................................................................... 7-3  
Table 7-2 Upgrade submenu in the network port ..................................................................................................... 7-3  
Table 7-3 Relevant parameters downloaded by the network port of system control board ..................................... 7-4  
Table 9-1 Description of LED status of the system control board SMUB................................................................. 9-1  
Table 9-2 Description of the indicator of the VDUB service board........................................................................... 9-6  
Table 12-1 ADSL parameter setting table .............................................................................................................. 12-3  
Table 12-2 ADSL subscriber line length attenuation table ..................................................................................... 12-4  
Table 12-3 ADSL line attenuation per kilometer within different frequency bands................................................. 12-4  
Table 12-4 ADSL line connection parameters........................................................................................................ 12-6  
Table 12-5 DC loop resistance for subscriber lines with different core diameters per kilometer ........................... 12-8  
Table 12-6 Line test reference table....................................................................................................................... 12-8  
Table 12-7 ADSL service line reference table...................................................................................................... 12-10  
Table 12-8 Broadband service user information record table .............................................................................. 12-11  
Table 12-9 ADSL setting parameters and connection parameter record table.................................................... 12-11  
Table 12-10 The minimum SNR value for the rates (for reference) ..................................................................... 12-18  
Table 12-11 DC resistance reference value of common lines.............................................................................. 12-20  
Table 12-12 VDSL setting parameters and connection parameter record table.................................................. 12-22  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 0-12  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
USE GUIDE TO THIS MANUAL  
Target Readers  
This manual is intended for system administrators responsible for the installation and maintenance of the 3P@C  
4450E IP-DSLAM (“3P@C 4450E”). Readers should have the following knowledge:  
„
„
„
„
„
Local Area Networks (LANs)  
Ethernet Concepts  
Ethernet Switching and Bridging Concepts  
Routing Concepts  
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)  
Contents  
This manual describes the installation and maintenance of 3P@C 4450E, including its features, components,  
component functions as well as equipment connections and maintenance.  
It briefly describes some software configuration information. For a detailed description of the commands and  
configuration operations, please refer to the 3P@C 4450E IP-DSLAM Software Configuration Manual and the  
3P@C 4450E IP-DSLAM Command Reference.  
The 3P@C 4450E IP DSLAM User Manual consists of three parts:  
Part I Hardware Installation  
It introduces the structure, installation, connection and basic configuration of the 3P@C 4450E , specifically  
including the following contents:  
Chapter  
Title  
Contents  
Chapter 1  
Product Overview  
Introduces the functions, features and system components of 3P@C 4450E  
Chapter 2  
Product Structure  
Describes the integrated equipment structure of 3P@C 4450E as well as the components and functions of its parts or modules  
Chapter 3  
Installation Preparation  
Describes the installation environment and safety requirements, installation tools, materials, product configuration and  
unpacking inspection of 3P@C 4450E  
Chapter 4  
Equipment Installation and Connection  
Describes the installation and cable connection of cabinets, chassis and modules of 3P@C 4450E  
Chapter 5  
Ethernet Cabling Suggestions  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 0-13  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Gives suggestions on the FE interface cabling in practical engineering  
Chapter 6  
System Configuration and Management  
Introduces the setup of the configuration environment, the command line system and the management mode of the related  
programs and files in the system  
Part II Maintenance  
It introduces the maintenance methods and related knowledge of he 3P@C 4450E , specifically including  
the following contents:  
Chapter  
Title  
Contents  
Chapter 7  
System Maintenance  
Describes system upgrade, configuration file management, common maintenance information view and handling of password  
loss  
Chapter 8  
Port Maintenance  
Describes optical interface detection and subscriber port status check  
Chapter 9  
Card Maintenance  
Describes the maintenance of SMUB and service boards such as VDUB/ADUB/ADUC  
Chapter 10  
Power Distribution System Maintenance  
Describes the check and handling of air switches  
Chapter 11  
Accessories Maintenance  
Describes the maintenance of dust filters and fan frames  
Chapter 12  
Line Provisioning & Maintenance  
Describes the provisioning and maintenance of ADSL and VDSL lines  
Chapter 13  
Fault Analysis and Solution  
Describes the fault location and information collection methods and the handling in the case of service interruption from time to  
time due to incorrect making of the network cables  
Chapter 14  
Operation Instructions for the Auxiliary Devices  
Describes the usage of the HD4825 DC/AC converter  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 0-14  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Appendix Common Troubleshooting & Relevant Knowledge  
It introduces the common troubleshooting and related knowledge of he 3P@C 4450E , specifically  
including the following contents:  
Appendix A  
Diagnosis of Common Faults  
Lists some common faults of 3P@C 4450E and the possible causes and solutions  
Appendix B  
Glossary  
Explains some terminologies involved in this manual  
Appendix C  
Fiber-related Knowledge  
Gives the related knowledge about optical fibers  
Conventions  
Conventions for icons are listed as follows:  
Icon  
Description  
Warning  
Notifies users that improper operation may cause damage to human body or equipment, service disruption or data loss during  
the process of installation and service configuration.  
Note  
This icon alerts users to some precautions.  
prompt  
This icon provides some text-related information and some guidance for users, and helps users understand the text better.  
Technical Support  
SAGEM establishes a complete hierarchical service system consisting of 3 levels, namely, the  
headquarter, area and local technical support centers. It provides all-weather and full-time telephone  
hotline services. Any time when users have problems on our product and network operation, feel free to  
contact us by local service support hotlines. Visit www.sagem.com to find out the local service support  
hotlines, to see the latest products and to download needed technical documents.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 0-15  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
PART I  
Hardware Installation  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 0-16  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 1  
1. Overview of the 3P@C 4450E IP-DSLAM  
This chapter describes the typical networking models, features and performance indexes of the 3P@C 4400E.  
1.1. System Overview  
As the heart of Next Generation network architecture, SAGEM 3P@C 4450E and 4048E are high-performance  
IP-DSLAM platforms that enable to deliver a wide variety of services such as broadband internet, voice over  
packet, LAN to LAN connections, video multicast streaming, leased lines and VPN, on any subscriber line.  
Thanks to their flexible, modular and scalable design, SAGEM 3P@C systems can provide all services simply by  
the composition of relevant units in the same carrier-class platform.  
NG-DSLAM  
SAGEM 3P@C supports any combinations of ADSL, ADSL2/2+ or VDSL user interfaces in several types of  
high-density configurations : mini-shelf and large shelves.  
Thanks to its internal architecture, the SAGEM 3P@C is able to concentrate user streams and switch them to  
several network interfaces, managing traffic parameters in order to guarantee QoS requirements. Subtending  
interfaces can be used to create star and daisy-chain extensions, offering a high scalability in order to reach  
remote users.  
A wide variety of Fast Ethernet, Giga Ethernet, Packet over SDH and even ATM uplink interfaces allows the  
connection to Next Generation IP and Ethernet networks. Enhanced video services can be delivered over  
ADSL2+ or ADSL connections, such as TV broadcast, Video on Demand and Pay Per View, using SAGEM  
3P@C multicast and IGMP capabilities. Connecting to ISP network, SAGEM 3P@C can support B-RAS features  
such as PPP session processing, tunnelling and termination, user authentication, IP address management and  
dynamic routing.  
Management  
SAGEM IONOS NMS management platform is designed for the provisionning, monitoring and supervision of the  
whole SAGEM 3P@C product family. This powerful NMS allows network-wide visibility and provides user-  
friendly graphical features. In addition, IONOS NMS enhances operational efficiency with its powerful  
client/server architecture.  
Scalable range  
SAGEM 3P@C is a complete range of access equipment, scaling from small sized configurations to large central  
office nodes.  
SAGEM 3P@C 4450E is dedicated to high density CO, connecting up to 448 DSL users per subrack, whereas  
SAGEM 3P@C 4048E is designed for small CO or remote sites connecting up to 48 ADSL users.  
The micro-DSLAM is targeted to specific applications, such as Multi-Tenant Unit (MTU) and remote area.  
Thanks to its stackable design, up to 192 users can be connected as the need for broadband connections grows.  
The 3P@C 4048E can be installed as a stand alone unit connected to a switched network or as an extension of  
3P@C 4450E in subtending mode.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 1-1 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
1.2. Representative Networking Applications  
SAGEM is in a unique position to assist it’s customers with the design and implementation of next-generation  
service offerings using Ethernet based broadband technology. SAGEM 3P@C solutions provide incumbent and  
competitive carriers with Internet access, Voice over IP(VoIP), broadcast video(IPTV), Video on Demand (VoD),  
Pay-Per-View, music channels and interactive television.  
SAGEM 3P@C approach has shown reduced Cost of Ownership through Ethernet-based IP broadband  
technology. Applying this technology to a solution customized for each customer can provide them with the  
technological and competitive advantage needed for continued success in the broadband service market.  
SAGEM 3P@C delivers an IP based broadband access solution that meets customer’s current needs as well as  
their future needs for multi-service offerings. Our products are currently supporting all current service offerings  
such as residential and commercial Internet access, Internet access through other ISPs, and LAN-to-LAN  
connectivity.  
SAGEM is able to build up Triple Play end to end solutions using F@st residential gateways and CPE, 3P@C  
IP-DSLAM, GigaP@C MAN Ethernet switches or Ethernet over SDH equipment, and B-RAS, Video Streamers  
and Voice Gateways and Softswitches.  
Content  
Live TV  
Providers  
Live Video  
Streaming Server  
Service Platform  
RGW F@st 3202  
Multicast IP  
IGMP Snooping  
Proxy  
Live Content Provide rs  
Multicast IP  
IGMP Snooping  
PIM Routing  
VoD  
VOD Content  
Providers  
3P@C 4400E  
STB  
VODServers  
GigaP@C F 5610  
Internet  
GigaP@C B6805  
GigaP@C B6808  
GigaP@C F 5610  
GigaP@C B6805  
L2/L3 switches  
MPLS/VPLS  
RIP/OSPF  
STB  
Ensure multicast  
F@st 908  
service only to  
authenticated users  
Provide multicast  
wire-speed  
RGW F@st 3190  
Soft Switch or VoIP Gateway  
forwarding  
3P@C 4400E  
Figure 1-1 Triple Play services in Next Generation Networks  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 1-1 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
1.3. System Composition  
The 3P@C 4450E is composed of the following parts:  
„
„
„
„
General chassis: It consists of a 10U chassis, a backplane, a fan module, a fan mounting  
support and an air deflector frame.  
Interface: Multiple uplink interfaces can be provided, including 100M electrical/optical  
interfaces, gigabit optical interfaces and ATM interfaces.  
Slots: Each 10U chassis provides 16 slots, where 2 are SMUB slots and 14 are service  
board/card slots.  
Power supply: The -48 V DC power supply is adopted. To connect to the 220 V AC power  
supply, it is necessary to use the primary power supply system.  
3P@C 4450E is installed in the 19-inch standard cabinet with the height of 2.2 m.  
Based on the high-performance ASIC, 3P@C 4450E adopts modular structure design to provide abundant uplink  
interface modules for your choice. See 1-1 for the specific module types. Each 3P@C 4450E consists of a 10U  
chassis, a fan module, an air deflector frame and a fan frame support. Up to 16 boards/cards can be installed in  
each 3P@C 4450E chassis. Among them, up to 2 SMUBs and 14 VDSL or ADSL service boards/cards can be  
installed. Each SMUB can provide 2 gigabit optical interfaces/4 100M optical interfaces/8 100M electrical  
interfaces/2 155M ATM interfaces. Each VDUB can provide 24 VDSL data interfaces, and the integrated  
equipment supports up to 336 VDSL interfaces. Each ADUB can provide 32 ADSL interfaces, and the integrated  
equipment supports up to 448 ADSL interfaces. See Table 1-2 for descriptions of the specific interface types.  
You may select the appropriate boards, cards and uplink interface modules as required.  
Table 1-1 Boards, cards and uplink interface modules provided by 3P@C 4450E  
Module model  
Name of the card/uplink interface  
module  
SMUB  
Service processor unit board  
VDSL service board  
VDUB  
ADUB, ADUC  
RTU  
ADSL unit board/card  
Route Transfer Unit  
DS-1GLX  
1-port gigabit long-wave single-mode  
interface board  
DS-1GSX  
1-port gigabit short-wave multi-mode  
interface board  
DS-4TXB  
DS-4ITX  
4-port 100M interface board  
Value-added service card  
DS-2FMM  
DS-2FSM  
DS-A155SM  
2-port 100M multi-mode interface board  
2-port 100M single-mode interface board  
1-port 155M long-wave single-mode ATM  
interface board  
DS-A155MM  
1-port 155M short-wave multi-mode ATM  
interface board  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 1-2 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Table 1-2 Name, quantity and type of the interfaces supported by 3P@C 4450E  
Interface name  
Quantity  
Interface  
type  
Description  
Gigabit optical interface (1000Base- 2 × 2  
SX/LX interface)  
SC  
Uplink  
interface  
100M optical interface (100Base-FX 4 × 2  
interface)  
SC  
Uplink  
interface  
100M  
electrical  
interface (8 + 1) × 2  
RJ-45  
SC  
Uplink  
interface  
(10/100Base-TX interface)  
ATM interface (155M single-/multi- 2 × 2  
mode ATM interface)  
Uplink  
interface  
Console interface  
VDSL interface  
ADSL interface  
1 × 2  
RJ-45  
Console  
interface  
24 × 14  
32 × 14  
European  
connector  
Subscriber  
interfaces  
European  
connector  
Subscriber  
interfaces  
For the detailed description of 3P@C 4450E structure,  
please refer to Chapter 2.  
prompt  
1.4. Hardware Features  
Table 1-3 lists the detailed performance indexes of the 3P@C 4450E.  
Table 1-3 Performance indexes of the 3P@C 4400E  
Physical performance  
3P@C 4450E  
Dimensions of the 10U chassis 441.7 mm × 426.5 mm × 389.2 mm  
(Height × Width × Depth)  
Dimensions of the fan module (Height 44 mm × 434.6 mm × 360.1 mm  
× Width × Depth)  
Dimensions of the air deflector frame 86.1 mm × 434.6 mm × 371.5 mm  
(Height × Width × Depth)  
17 kg when empty (containing a 10U chassis, a backplane, a fan module, a fan mounting  
support and an air deflector frame)  
Weight  
41 kg when fully populated (containing a 10U chassis, a backplane, a fan module, a fan  
mounting support, an air deflector frame and 16 boards)  
Temperature  
Humidity  
-5 °C ~ 50 °C  
Working  
environment  
5% ~ 95%, non-condensing  
DC: -40.5V ~ -57V  
Power supply  
Power consumption  
≤ 1,200 W (1,200 W in full configuration mode)  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 1-3 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Physical performance  
Uplink ports  
3P@C 4450E  
100M electrical and optical interfaces, gigabit optical interfaces  
and ATM interfaces. All optical interfaces support single-mode  
and multi-mode interface types, and the 100M optical interfaces  
support the Trunk function  
Port  
configuration  
Service ports  
VDSL and ADSL ports  
Slot  
16, among which, 2 SMUB slots and 14 service board/card slots  
Hot plug  
Supported  
Error  
tolerance  
design  
Hot backup  
Redundancy hot backup for core parts  
CPU detection  
CPU detection  
Negotiation function  
Full-duplex auto-negotiation  
Packet transfer rate Wire speed  
( L2/L3)  
Basic  
performance  
Forwarding mode  
Port status  
Store-and-forwarding  
Communication status and LINK status  
Power status, system status & hot-swap display  
100 meters Categories-3/4/5 shielded/unshielded twisted pairs  
Status  
indication  
Universal status  
10/100Base-TX  
100Base-FX  
62.5/125µm multi-mode fiber (max. 2km), 9µm single-mode fiber  
(max. 15km)  
Max.  
cable  
length  
1000Base-SX  
62.5/125 µm multi-mode fiber (max. 275m), 50/125 µm multi-  
mode fiber (max. 550m)  
1000Base-LX  
9µm single-mode fiber (max.10km)  
Electromagnetic compatibility  
Security specifications  
EMS feature: Complying with the standards of EN 55024 , ETSI  
EN 300 386, CISPR 24, GB/T 17626, GB/T 17618 and IEC  
61000-4  
Complying with the standards of EN 60950, UL 60950,  
CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO. 60950, GB 4943, IEC 60950, and AS/NZS  
60950  
100Base-FX  
interface  
SC  
SC  
SC  
1000Base-SX  
interface  
1000Base-LX  
interface  
DS-A155MM (155M SC  
Interface type  
multi-mode  
interface  
ATM)  
DS-A155SM (155M SC  
single-mode ATM)  
interface  
Console interface  
RJ-45  
RJ-45  
10/100Base-TX  
interface  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 1-4 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
This page intentionally left blank  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 2  
2. 3P@C 4450E Hardware Structure  
This chapter describes hardware structure of the 3P@C 4450E, including the whole-equipment  
configurations and the description of each service module.  
2.1. Shelf Configuration  
2.1.1. Structure of the General Chassis  
The general chassis of 3P@C 4450E is called 3P@C 4450E-IPDSLAM-10U general chassis kit. It  
contains a 10U chassis, a backplane, a fan module, a fan mounting support and an air deflector frame.  
Its outside view is shown in Figure 2-1.  
Figure 2-1 General chassis of 3P@C 4450E  
10U chassis  
Fan module  
Air deflector  
frame  
The general chassis composition of 3P@C 4450E is described in Table 2-1:  
Table 2-1 General chassis composition of 3P@C 4450E  
Name  
Height Composition  
Application  
10U chassis 10U  
Slots 0 ~ 1  
Slots 2 ~ 15  
6 fans inside  
For SMUB  
For ADUB, ADUC or VDUB  
For system cooling  
Fan  
1U  
module  
Air deflector 2U  
frame  
Slant  
inside  
spacer Air ducts (inlet from the front and  
outlet from the rear)  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-1 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
3P@C 4450E provides the uplink interface and the Console port on the SMUB. The rest subscriber  
line outlets are set on the backplane, that is, the rear leading-out mode is adopted. Therefore, all the  
subscriber line interfaces and power supply interfaces are provided on the rear of 3P@C 4450E, as  
shown in Figure 2-2:  
Figure 2-2 Rear view of the general chassis of 3P@C 4450E  
Grounding  
socket  
DIN  
connector  
Power interface  
of the fans  
Power interface of  
the equipment  
Power interface of  
the fan module  
Air outlet of the air  
deflector frame  
Viewed from the rear, the general chassis of 3P@C 4450E consists of the following parts:  
„
„
„
DIN connector: Subscriber line interface  
Equipment power supply interface: -48 V DC power supply interface  
Fan power supply interface: Connects with the fan module power socket to supply  
power to the fan  
„
Fan module power socket: Connects with the fan power supply interface to supply  
power to the fan  
„
„
Grounding socket: Equipment grounding  
Outlet of the air deflector frame: Hot air outlet of the switch below when multiple sets  
of equipment are working  
The DIN connectors are used for the subscriber line interfaces in two rows (upper and lower). Each  
DSL service board needs 2 groups of subscriber lines. One group is the LU line that corresponds to  
the connector in the upper row and is connected to the subscriber line, and the other group is the LC  
line that corresponds to the connector in the lower row and is connected to the PSTN switch. The slots  
correspond to the types of the service boards inserted in the chassis front to support subscribers of  
different quantities. For the definition and connection method of subscriber lines, refer to the contents  
in Section 4.7.  
„
„
For ADUB/ADUC, each slot supports 32 subscribers.  
For VDUB, each slot supports 24 subscribers.  
The 3P@C 4450E rear also provides an equipment power supply interface, a fan power supply  
interface and a fan module power supply socket.  
Here the -48 V DC power supply is adopted for 3P@C  
4450E.  
prompt  
In addition, two grounding sockets marked with  
equipment grounding.  
are provided on the upper part of the rear panel for  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-2 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
2.1.2.10U Chassis  
The 10U chassis is adopted for 3P@C 4450E. Altogether 2 SMUBs and 14 ADSL/VDSL service  
boards can be installed at the same time, as shown in the following figure:  
Figure 2-3 Front view of the 10U chassis  
Each 10U chassis provides 16 slots which are numbered 0 ~ 15 from left to right. The former 2 slots  
(slots 0 ~ 1) with a width of 1.4 inch each are used to insert the SMUBs. SMUBs can be inserted in  
both slots at the same time, or only one SMUB is inserted either in slot 0 or in slot 1. The latter 14 slots  
(slots 2 ~ 15) with a width of 1 inch and a depth of 340 mm each are used to insert VDUB or  
ADUB/ADUC. Descriptions of the slots for the SMUB and the service boards are shown in Figure 2-4.  
Figure 2-4 Slots for the SMUB and service boards  
1. The service board slots support the interchange of VDSL  
and ADSL service boards.  
2. Please install dummy panels in the slots not inserted with  
any boards.  
prompt  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-3 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
2.1.3.Fan Module  
In the lower part of the 10U chassis is a 1U fan module, as shown in the following figure:  
Figure 2-5 Front view of the fan module  
Alarm LED  
Screw  
Hidden puller adapter  
Viewed from the front, the fan module consists of the following parts:  
„
„
„
Screw: Used to fix the fan module.  
Alarm indicator: Used for giving out failure alarm of the fan module  
Hidden puller adapter: Usually closed. When removing the fan module, it can be  
used to pull out the fan module. For the specific operations, refer to the related  
contents in Section 4.2.2.  
Each fan module provides 6 radiator fans, as shown in Figure 2-6:  
Figure 2-6 Outside view of the radiator fans  
2.1.4.Air Deflector Frame  
Below the fan module is a 2U air deflector frame with the front inlet and rear outlet design and isolated  
in the middle by a spacer. The sectional view of the air deflector frame is shown in the following figure:  
Figure 2-7 Sectional view of the air deflector frame  
Spacer  
When the switch is operating, the cold air is drawn in above  
the spacer. If multiple switches are operating at the same  
time, the hot air coming out from the lower switch are  
exhausted below the spacer via the rear of the air deflector  
frame.  
prompt  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-4 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
To satisfy the requirement for long-term equipment operating temperature, the general chassis design  
of 3P@C 4450E fully considers the system heat dissipation. When a single device is operating, the  
heat dissipation of the system is shown in Figure 2-8, where, the air is led in from the lower part and  
led out from the upper part in the chassis front. The air outlet is on the top of the switch.  
Figure 2-8 Heat dissipation of a single system  
Hot air is discharged  
Cold air comes in  
On the air deflector frame is a fan module with 6 radiator fans built in. When the fans are started, the  
cold air is drawn in from the inlet on the front of the air deflector frame, then goes upward in the  
cabinet. It passes by the switch, and takes away the heat of the switch, and finally goes out from the  
top of the switch.  
When multiple switches operate at the same time, the hot air in the lower switch are let out from the  
top of the switch, and exhausted via the rear outlet of the air deflector frame above it. The following  
figure shows the air ducts in the cabinet in the case that multiple switches are operating at the same  
time.  
Figure 2-9 Air ducts inside the cabinet  
The radiator fans are used for cooling and heat dissipation to  
improve the temperature features of the system and ensure the  
normal operation of the switch. Make sure these ventilation  
holes are not blocked and enough space is reserved on two  
sides of the equipment for air circulation, ventilation and heat  
Warning  
dissipation. Otherwise, if the components in the equipment are  
overheated, the system would not work normally or even the  
components would be damaged by overheat.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-5 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
2.2. Full Configuration of the Cabinet  
In the full configuration mode, 3 sets of 3P@C 4450E can be installed in a 19-inch standard cabinet  
with the height of 2.2 m, as shown in Figure 2-10:  
Figure 2-10 Full configuration of 3P@C 4450E  
2.2 m cabinet  
10U chassis  
Service function  
modules  
1U fan module  
2U air deflector  
frame  
ESD socket  
Grounding  
post  
In the full configuration mode, the 3P@C 4450E system comprises 6 major parts: A standard 19-inch  
cabinet with the height of 2.2 m, a 10U chassis, a 1U fan module, 2U air deflector frame, service  
functional modules (including SMUB and ADSL/VDSL service boards) and the -48 V DC power  
distribution system.  
1. The -48 V DC power distribution system is on the rear of  
the integrated equipment.  
2. To connect to the 220 V AC power supply, it is necessary  
to use the primary power supply system.  
prompt  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-6 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
2.3. SMUB and Service Boards  
2.3.1.Service Processor Unit Board (SMUB)  
1.1.1.1  
Structure of the SMUB  
As the control center of 3P@C 4450E, the SMUB is responsible for the data exchange and control  
management of the system and it provides uplink interfaces for the ADSL and VDSL subscribers to  
access the network.  
The single-SMUB or dual-SMUB operating mode can be adopted for 3P@C 4450E. When the single-  
SMUB operating mode is adopted, SMUB can be inserted in slot 0 or 1 of the 10U chassis. Hot  
backup can be implemented in the system when the dual-SMUB operating mode is adopted, in which,  
two SMUBs can be inserted in slot 0 and slot 1 of the 10U chassis respectively. The SMUB in slot 0  
serves as the active one, and the SMUB in slot 1 serves as the standby one, as shown in the following  
figure:  
Figure 2-11 Slots of the SMUB  
Active  
SMUB  
Standby  
SMUB  
Only the active SMUB is active at one time. The equipment can be managed only via the Console  
interface on the active SMUB, and the Console interface on the standby SMUB is suspended.  
The rear view of the SMUB is shown in Figure 2-12:  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-7 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 2-12 Front view of the SMUB  
Upper puller  
adapter  
System running  
state LED  
Console  
interface  
Uplink interface  
extended slot  
10/100 Base-TX  
Uplink interface  
Lower puller  
adapter  
1.1.1.2  
Interface features of the SMUB  
Table 2-2 Interface features of the SMUB  
Interface  
name  
Console  
interface  
Quant Interface  
Interface  
attributes  
RS-232C  
Description  
ity  
type  
1
RJ-45  
Located at the uppermost of the  
SMUB, the Console interface can  
be used to manage and configure  
3P@C 4450E via the command  
line interface.  
Ethernet  
uplink  
interface  
1
RJ-45  
10/100Base Located at the lowermost of the  
-TX  
SMUB, it is used to connect the  
VDSL and ADSL subscribers to the  
IP network.  
1.1.1.3  
Extended slots of the SMUB  
The SMUB provides 2 extended slots for installing uplink interface modules. 3P@C 4450E supports  
the following uplink interface modules:  
Table 2-3 Type of uplink interface modules  
Module type Name  
Description  
Interface  
type  
DS-1GLX  
DS-1GSX  
1-port gigabit long- Providing 1 long-wave optical SC  
wave optical uplink interface of 1G rate  
interface module  
1-port gigabit short- Providing 1 short-wave optical SC  
wave  
optical uplink interface of 1G rate  
interface module  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-8 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Module type Name  
Description  
Interface  
type  
100Base-FX SC  
optical uplink single-mode optical  
interface module interfaces  
2-port 100M multi- Providing  
mode optical uplink  
interface module interfaces  
1-port long-wave Providing 1 155M long-wave SC  
single-mode ATM single-mode uplink ATM  
DS-2FSM  
2-port 100M single- Providing  
mode  
2
DS-2FMM  
DS-A155SM  
2
100Base-FX SC  
multi-mode optical  
optical  
module  
1-port  
interface optical interface  
DS-A155MM  
short-wave Providing 1 155M short-wave SC  
multi-mode  
optical  
ATM multi-mode uplink ATM optical  
interface interface  
module  
DS-4TXB  
DS-4ITX  
4-port  
100M Providing  
4
10/100Base-TX RJ-45  
electrical interface uplink electrical interfaces  
module  
Value-added  
service card  
Providing  
uplink electrical interfaces  
4
10/100Base-TX RJ-45  
For the detailed description of uplink interface modules,  
please refer to Section 2.5.  
prompt  
1.1.1.4  
Indicators of the SMUB  
The front panel of SMUB provides LEDs for indicating the system operating status and the Ethernet  
interface working status. The administrator can judge the system operation status according to the  
display of these LEDs so as to diagnose the network fault in time, reduce the operation loss and  
improve work efficiency. Descriptions of the LED indicators are given in Table 2-4:  
Table 2-4 Status definitions of the LED indicators on the SMUB  
LED  
Identific Color  
ation  
Status  
Description  
System  
running  
status  
RUN  
Green  
Off  
The system does not operate  
Flashin The system operates normally.  
g
indicator  
ALM  
Red  
Off  
ON  
The system operates normally  
System alarm. This LED flashes  
once when the equipment is started  
and conducts self-check. It does  
not indicate any alarm at this time  
The corresponding LED is solid on  
after a stable connection is set up  
at the port  
Ethernet  
interface  
working  
status  
LINK  
ACT  
Green  
Green  
Solid  
on  
Off  
The port is not connected  
indicators  
Flashin Data are being received/transmitted  
g
Off  
on the port  
No data  
received/transmitted on the port  
are  
being  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-9 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
2.3.2.VDSL Unit Board (VDUB)  
1.1.1.5  
Structure of the VDUB  
VDUB is the VDSL office end access service board of 3P@C 4450E. Each VDUB provides 24 VDSL  
subscriber interfaces. The subscriber interface is connected to the DIN connector on the backplane,  
thus implementing data transmission via the existing data switching line (such as telephone line) and  
separation of data transmission from voice transmission.  
The VDUB features high security and supports IEEE 802.1Q VLAN to provide secure isolation for  
each subscriber. In addition, it supports the port locking function to prevent illegal subscribers from  
accessing the network.  
VDUB adopts the -48 V power supply with an allowable voltage ranging from -36 V to -72 V. It  
supports hot plugging, and can identify the rack slots, thus facilitating the management and  
maintenance.  
When used in 3P@C 4450E, the VDUBs can be inserted in slots 2 ~ 15 of the 10U chassis, as shown  
in the following figure:  
Figure 2-13 Slots of the VDUB  
The front view of the VDUB is shown in the following figure:  
Figure 2-14 Front view of the VDSL  
VDUB running  
state LED  
Upper puller  
adapter  
Subscriber interface  
working state LED  
Lower puller adapter  
The front panel of VDUB provides two groups of LEDs, as follows:  
„
VDUB running status indicators RUN and ALM, which are in the upper part of the  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-10  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
VDUB.  
„
VDSL subscriber interface working status indicators, which are in the middle of the  
VDUB. The VDUB provides 24 VDSL subscriber interfaces. The working status of  
each interface is shown by two indicators, LINK and ACT.  
1.1.1.6  
Indicators of the VDUB  
Descriptions of the LED indicators on the front panel of VDUB are given in Table 2-5:  
Table 2-5 Status definitions of the LED indicators on the front panel of VDUB  
LED  
Identific Color  
ation  
Status  
Description  
VDUB  
running  
status  
RUN  
Green  
On  
Off  
The system is powered on  
The system is powered off or  
abnormal  
indicator  
Flashing  
Off  
ON  
The VDUB operates normally  
The VDUB operates normally  
VDUB alarm  
The corresponding LED is solid  
on after a stable connection is  
set up at the subscriber interface  
The subscriber interface is not  
connected with any subscriber  
ALM  
LINK  
Red  
VDSL  
Green  
Solid on  
subscriber  
interface  
working  
status  
Off  
indicators  
ACT  
Green  
Flashing  
Data  
are  
being  
received/transmitted on the  
subscriber interface  
Off  
No  
data  
are  
being  
received/transmitted on the  
subscriber interface  
2.3.3.ADSL Unit Board (ADUB)  
1.1.1.7  
Structure of the ADUB  
The ADUB is used to provide ADSL data access services. Each ADUB provides 32 ADSL subscriber  
interfaces. The subscriber interface is connected to the DIN connector on the backplane, thus  
implementing data transmission via the existing data switching line (such as telephone line) and  
separation of data transmission from voice transmission.  
The ADUB features high security and supports IEEE 802.1Q VLAN to provide secure isolation for  
each subscriber. In addition, it supports the port locking function to prevent illegal subscribers from  
accessing the network.  
ADUB adopts the -48 V DC power supply with an allowable voltage ranging from -44 V DC to -60 V  
DC. It supports hot plugging, and can identify the rack slots, thus facilitating the management and  
maintenance.  
When used in 3P@C 4450E, the ADUBs can be inserted in slots 2 ~ 15 of the 10U chassis, as shown  
in Figure 2-15:  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-11  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 2-15 Slots of the ADUB  
The front view of the ADUB is shown in the following figure:  
Figure 2-16 Front view of the ADUB  
ADUB running  
state LED  
Upper puller  
adapter  
Lower puller  
adapter  
1.1.1.8  
Indicators of the ADUB  
The front panel of ADUB provides LED indicators showing the ADUB running status. Descriptions of  
the LEDS are given in the following table.  
Table 2-6 Status definitions of the LED indicators on the front panel of ADUB  
LED  
Identific Color  
ation  
Status  
Description  
ADUB  
running  
status  
RUN  
Green  
On  
Off  
The system is powered on  
The system is powered off or  
abnormal  
indicator  
Flashing  
Off  
ON  
The ADUB operates normally  
The ADUB operates normally  
ADUB alarm  
ALM  
Red  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-12  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
2.3.4.ADSL Unit Card (ADUC)  
1.1.1.9  
Structure of the ADUC  
In addition to the same functions and features as the ADUB, the ADUC also has a line capture relay  
that can be used together with the ADSL special-purpose test device to provide the wiring function.  
When used in 3P@C 4450E, the ADUCs can be inserted in slots 2 ~ 15 of the 10U chassis, as shown  
in the following figure:  
Figure 2-17 Slots of the ADUC  
The rear view of the ADUC is shown in Figure 2-18:  
Figure 2-18 Front view of the ADUC  
ADUC running  
state LEDa  
Upper puller  
adapter  
Lower puller  
adapter  
1.1.1.10  
Indicators of the ADUC  
The front panel of ADUC provides LED indicators showing the ADUC running status. Descriptions of  
the LEDS are given in the following table.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-13  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Table 2-7Status definitions of the LED indicators on the front panel of ADUC  
LED  
Identific Color  
ation  
Status  
Description  
ADUC  
running  
status  
RUN  
Green  
On  
Off  
The system is powered on  
The system is powered off or  
abnormal  
indicator  
Flashing  
Off  
ON  
The ADUC operates normally  
The ADUC operates normally  
ADUC alarm  
ALM  
Red  
2.4. Power Distribution System  
2.4.1.Overview  
The DC distribution unit of 3P@C 4450E adopts the -48 V DC power supply. It is 4U high and is fixed  
to the upper part of the equipment rack rear. The -48 V DC input power is divided into 4 tributaries  
whose outputs are controlled by air switches separately. Their connection relations are shown in  
Figure 2-19:  
Figure 2-19 Connection relations  
2.4.2.Functional Features  
Input requirements  
1. -48 V single input.  
2. -48 V input range: -36 ~ -72 V DC.  
3. -48 V total input power: 3,300 W.  
Output requirements  
1. The -48 V power is output to 4 channels that are led out by wiring terminals and controlled by air  
switches.  
2. The rated current of the air switch is 32 A.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-14  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
3. The output power of each -48 V output is 1,200 W.  
Cable selection  
„
The -48V input cable and the BGND and PGND external connection cables are  
16mm2 blue, black and yellow-green power cables respectively.  
„
The four -48V output cables and the BGND and PGND internal connection cables  
are 6mm2 blue, black and yellow-green power cables respectively.  
For the connection of DC power supplies, refer to Section  
4.3. To connect to the 220 V AC power supply, it is  
necessary to use the primary power supply system.  
prompt  
2.5. Optional Uplink Interface Modules  
The modular structure is adopted for 3P@C 4450E. Each 10U chassis has 16 slots, the former two of  
which are for inserting the SMUB boards. The SMUB provides multiple optional types of uplink  
interface modules to meet different user networking requirements. The following uplink interface  
modules are supported:  
Table 2-8 Types of uplink interface modules  
Module type  
Gigabit  
Model  
DS-1GLX  
Description  
1-port  
gigabit  
long-wave  
optical  
interface  
module  
interface module  
1-port gigabit short-wave optical  
interface module  
DS-1GSX  
DS-2FMM  
DS-2FSM  
Megabit  
interface  
module  
2-port  
100M  
multi-mode  
optical  
interface module  
2-port 100M single-mode optical  
interface module  
DS-4TXB  
DS-4ITX  
ATM interface DS-A155SM  
module  
4-port 100M electrical interface module  
4-port 100M electrical interface module  
1-port 155M long-wave single-mode  
ATM optical interface module  
DS-P155MM 1-port 155M short-wave multi-mode  
ATM optical interface module  
The following describes the commonly used gigabit interface module (DS-1GLX/DS-1GSX) and the  
100M interface module (DS-2FMM/ DS-2FSM/ DS-4TXB/ DS-4ITX) respectively.  
2.5.1.1-port Gigabit Long-wave Optical Interface Module (DS-1GLX)  
The DS-1GLX module provides 1 gigabit long-wave Ethernet optical interface. The physical interface  
is a standard SC optical interface whose maximum transmission distance is 10 km. A pair of single-  
mode fibers is required for it. The fiber length and peer interface type depend on the real situation.  
1.1.1.11  
Structure of the DS-1GLX module  
The front panel of the DS-1GLX module is shown in Figure 2-20:  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-15  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 2-20 Front view of the DS-1GLX module  
DS-1GLX gigabit  
interface module  
SC long-wave  
optical interface  
Status LED  
The front panel of the DS-1GLX module is composed of the following parts:  
„
„
„
1 standard SC gigabit long-wave optical interface  
1 LINK status indicator  
1 ACT status indicator  
Of the above, the different states of LINK and ACT indicators show the port operating status. For  
details, refer to Table 2-9.  
1.1.1.12  
Indicators of the DS-1GLX module  
Table 2-9 Status definitions of the LINK and ACT LEDs on the DS-1GLX module  
Display  
LED  
Color  
Description  
state  
LINK  
Green  
Solid on  
After a stable connection between a port and the  
equipment is established, the indicator of the port  
stays solid on.  
Off  
The link on the port is down.  
ACT  
Green  
Flashing  
Off  
Data are being received/transmitted on the port  
No data are being received/transmitted on the  
port.  
1.1.1.13  
Interface features of the DS-1GLX module  
Table 2-10 Gigabit long-wave optical interface features of the DS-1GLX module  
Module  
type  
Quantity  
of  
Interface Interface  
Fiber  
specifications  
Transmission  
distance  
type  
attributes  
interfaces  
DS-1GLX  
1
SC  
1000Base- 9/125  
LX single-mode  
fiber with  
µm 10km  
a
wavelength of  
1,310 nm  
The fiber system is divided into two types by the optical transmission mode: Multi-mode fibers and  
single-mode fibers. The single-mode fiber is the fiber that transmits signal in a single mode at the  
given wavelength. Its core is about 4 ~ 10µm, which is quite small. The fiber features high  
transmission bandwidth and large transmission capacity.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-16  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
To know more about fibers, please refer to the contents in  
Appendix C.  
prompt  
2.5.2.1-port Gigabit Short-wave Optical Interface Module (DS-1GSX)  
The DS-1GSX module provides 1 gigabit short-wave Ethernet optical interface. The physical interface  
is a standard SC optical interface whose maximum transmission distance is 550 m. A pair of multi-  
mode fibers is required for it. The fiber length and peer interface type depend on the real situation.  
1.1.1.14  
Structure of the DS-1GSX module  
The front panel of the DS-1GSX module is shown in the following figure:  
Figure 2-21 Front view of the DS-1GSX module  
DS-1GSX gigabit  
interface module  
DS-1GSX gigabit  
interface module  
Status LED  
The front panel of the DS-1GSX module is composed of the following parts:  
„
„
„
1 standard SC gigabit short-wave optical interface  
1 LINK status indicator  
1 ACT status indicator  
Of the above, the different states of LINK and ACT indicators show the port operating status. For  
details, refer to Table 2-11.  
1.1.1.15  
Indicators of the DS-1GSX module  
Table 2-11 Status definitions of the LINK and ACT LEDs on the DS-1GSX module  
Display  
LED  
Color  
Description  
state  
LINK  
Green  
Solid on  
After a stable connection between a port and the  
equipment is established, the indicator of the port  
stays solid on.  
Off  
The link on the port is down.  
ACT  
Green  
Flashing  
Off  
Data are being received/transmitted on the port  
No data are being received/transmitted on the  
port.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-17  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
1.1.1.16  
Interface features of the DS-1GSX module  
Table 2-12 Interface features of the DS-1GSX module  
Module  
type  
Quantity  
of  
Interface  
type  
Interface  
attributes  
Fiber  
specifications  
Transmi  
ssion  
interfaces  
distance  
DS-1GSX  
1
SC  
1000Base- 62.5/125 µmmulti-  
SX  
mode fiber with a  
wavelength of 850  
nm  
50/125 µm multi-  
mode fiber with a  
wavelength of 850  
nm  
275m  
550m  
The fiber system is divided into two types by the optical transmission mode: Multi-mode fibers and  
single-mode fibers. A multi-mode optical fiber is a fiber that transmits signals in multiple modes at a  
given wavelength. Phase difference may occur in the multi-mode transmission because the lights of  
different modes will transfer at different speeds along a line. As a result, transmission distortion will  
occur and thus the transmission band will be restricted. Two specifications are available now for the  
cores of multi-mode optical fibers: 62.5 µm and 50 µm. In ISO/IEC 11801, both the two modes are  
recognized transmission media.  
2.5.3.2-port 100M Multi-mode Optical Interface Module (DS-2FMM)  
The DS-2FMM module provides 2 100M multi-mode fast Ethernet optical interfaces. The physical  
interface is a standard SC optical interface and the multi-mode fiber is used whose maximum  
transmission distance is 2 km. Two pairs of multi-mode fibers are required for it. The fiber length and  
peer interface type depend on the real situation.  
1.1.1.17  
Structure of the DS-2FMM module  
The front panel of the DS-2FMM module is shown in the Figure 2-22:  
Figure 2-22 Front view of the DS-2FMM module  
DS-2FMM 100M  
interface module  
SC multi-mode  
optical interface  
Status LED  
The front panel of the DS-2FMM module is composed of the following parts:  
„
„
„
2 standard SC 100M multi-mode optical interfaces  
2 LINK status indicator  
2 ACT status indicator  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-18  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Of the above, the different states of LINK and ACT indicators show the port operating status. For  
details, refer to Table 2-13.  
1.1.1.18  
Indicators of the DS-2FMM module  
Table 2-13 Status definitions of the LINK and ACT LEDs on the DS-2FMM module  
Display  
LED  
Color  
Description  
state  
LINK  
Green  
Solid on  
After a stable connection between a port and the  
equipment is established, the indicator of the port  
stays solid on.  
Off  
The link on the port is down.  
ACT  
Yellow  
Flashing  
Data are being received/transmitted on the  
optical port.  
Off  
No data are being received/transmitted on the  
optical port.  
1.1.1.19  
Interface features of the DS-2FMM module  
Table 2-14 Interface features of the DS-2FMM module  
Module  
type  
Quantity of Interface Interface  
Fiber  
specification  
s
Transmission  
distance  
interfaces  
type  
attributes  
62.5/125 µm  
multi-mode  
fiber  
DS-2FMM  
2
SC  
100Base-  
FMM  
2km  
2.5.4.2-port 100M Single-mode Optical Interface Module (DS-2FSM)  
The DS-2FSM module provides 2 100M single-mode fast Ethernet optical interfaces. The physical  
interface is a standard SC optical interface and the single-mode fiber is used whose maximum  
transmission distance is 15 km. Two pairs of single-mode fibers are required for it. The fiber length  
and peer interface type depend on the real situation.  
1.1.1.20  
Structure of the DS-2FSM module  
The front panel of the DS-2FSM module is shown in the following figure:  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-19  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 2-23 Front view of the DS-2FSM module  
DS-2FSM 100M  
interface module  
SC single-mode  
optical interface  
Status  
LED  
The front panel of the DS-2FSM module is composed of the following parts:  
„
„
„
2 standard SC 100M single-mode optical interfaces  
2 LINK status indicator  
2 ACT status indicator  
Of the above, the different states of LINK and ACT indicators show the port operating status. For  
details, refer to Table 2-15.  
1.1.1.21  
Indicators of the DS-2FSM module  
Table 2-15 Status definitions of the LINK and ACT LEDs on the DS-2FSM module  
Display  
LED  
Color  
Description  
state  
LINK  
Green  
Solid on  
After a stable connection between a port and the  
equipment is established, the indicator of the port  
stays solid on.  
Off  
The link on the port is down.  
ACT  
Yellow  
Flashing  
Data are being received/transmitted on the  
optical port.  
Off  
No data are being received/transmitted on the  
optical port.  
1.1.1.22  
Interface features of the DS-2FSM module  
Table 2-16 Interface features of the DS-2FSM module  
Module  
type  
Quantity  
of  
Interface Interface  
Fiber  
specifications  
Transmission  
distance  
type  
attributes  
interfaces  
DS-  
2FSM  
2
SC  
100Base-  
FSM  
9µm  
mode fiber  
single- 15km  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-20  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
2.5.5.4-port 100M Electrical Interface Module (DS-4TXB)  
The DS-4TXB module provides 4 100M fast Ethernet electrical interfaces. The physical interface is an  
RJ-45 connector and the C5 twisted pair cable is used whose transmission distance is 100 m. The  
MDI/MDIX self calibration function is supported. The cable length and peer interface type depend on  
the real situation.  
1.1.1.23  
Structure of the DS-4TXB module  
The front panel of the DS-4TXB module is shown in the following figure:  
Figure 2-24 Front view of the DS-4TXB module  
The front panel of the DS-4TXB module is composed of the following parts:  
„
„
„
4 RJ-45 10/100M Ethernet electrical interfaces  
4 ACT indicators  
4 LINK indicators  
Of the above, the different states of LINK and ACT indicators show the port operating status. For  
details, refer to Table 2-17.  
1.1.1.24  
Indicators of the DS-4TXB module  
Table 2-17 Status definitions of the LINK and ACT LEDs on the DS-4TXB module  
Display  
LED  
Color  
Description  
state  
LINK  
Green  
Solid on  
After a stable connection between a port and the  
equipment is established, the indicator of the port  
stays solid on.  
Off  
The link on the port is down.  
ACT  
Yellow  
Flashing  
Off  
Data are being received/transmitted on the port  
No data are being received/transmitted on the  
port.  
1.1.1.25  
Interface features of the DS-4TXB module  
Table 2-18 Interface features of the DS-4TXB module  
Module  
type  
Quantity  
of  
Interface Interface  
Fiber  
specifications  
Transmission  
distance  
type  
attributes  
interfaces  
DS-4TXB  
4
RJ-45  
10/100Base- Category-3/4/5  
TX shielded/unshie  
100m  
lded  
twisted  
pairs  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-21  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
2.5.6. VAS Card (DS-4ITX)  
The VAS card (DS-4ITX) is developed to meet the growing demands of users for IN services.  
Currently, it provides L2TP VPDN service, PPPoE Server Proxy service, network interface PPPoE  
termination service, and VMAC service. It will provide the MPLS VPN service in the future.  
Through software configuration, the VAS card can be loaded with different IN service FPGA logics to  
support diversified IN services and flexibly meet the new market requirements.  
The DS-4ITX module provides 4 100M fast Ethernet electrical interfaces. The physical interface is an  
RJ-45 connector and the C5 twisted pair cable is used whose transmission distance is 100 m. The  
cable length and peer interface type depend on the real situation.  
1.1.1.26  
Structure of the DS-4ITX module  
The front panel of the DS-4ITX module is shown in the following figure:  
Figure 2-25 Front view of the DS-4ITX module  
The front panel of the DS-4ITX module is composed of the following parts:  
„
„
„
4 RJ-45 10/100M Ethernet electrical interfaces  
4 ACT indicators  
4 LINK indicators  
Of the above, the different states of LINK and ACT indicators show the port operating status. For  
details, refer to Table 2-19.  
1.1.1.27  
Indicators of the DS-4ITX module  
Table 2-19 Status definitions of the LINK and ACT LEDs on the DS-4ITX module  
Display  
LED  
Color  
Description  
state  
LINK  
Green  
Solid on  
After a stable connection between a port and the  
equipment is established, the indicator of the port  
stays solid on.  
Off  
The link on the port is down.  
ACT  
Yellow  
Flashing  
Off  
Data are being received/transmitted on the port  
No data are being received/transmitted on the  
port.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-22  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
1.1.1.28  
Interface features of the DS-4ITX module  
Table 2-20 Interface features of the DS-4ITX module  
Module  
type  
DS-4ITX  
Quantity of Interface Interface  
Fiber  
specifications  
Transmission  
distance  
100m  
interfaces  
type  
attributes  
4
RJ-45  
10/100Base Category-3/4/5  
-TX shielded/unshiel  
ded  
twisted  
pairs  
2.6. Route Transfer Unit (RTU)  
At present, some special application modes of 3P@C 4450E need to be supported by the RTU,  
including the non-PPPoE packet filtering and user name binding in the L2 PPPoE transparent  
transmission mode.  
With the board structure, the RTU is composed of such components as chips, crystal  
oscillators and resistance-capacitance devices. It does not provide any external interface. It  
is installed on the SMUB (see Section 4.4.2 for its installation) and connected to the socket  
on the SMUB via the pins on the board to provide the L3 routing and flow table functions. Its  
structure is shown in the following figure.  
Table 2-21 Structure of the RTU  
Screw  
hole  
Connection  
socket  
Front face  
Rear face  
The RTU is optional. You may use it as required.  
„
When 3P@C 4450E uses the 100M electrical interface uplink interface module,  
though the RTU routing function can be provided, the L2 application mentioned  
above will be limited. To perfectly support the L2 application, it is necessary to add  
the RTU.  
„
When 3P@C 4450E uses the gigabit electrical interface uplink interface module, the  
L2 application mentioned above can be implemented without using the RTU.  
When 3P@C 4450E uses the ATM interface uplink interface module, the RTU must be adopted so as  
to provide the L2 application function mentioned above and the L3 function.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-23  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2-24  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 4  
3. Installation Preparation  
3.1. Environmental Requirements  
3.1.1.Temperature and Humidity Requirements  
To ensure the normal running of the equipment and prolong its service life, please make sure that  
the temperature and humidity of the equipment room are within the allowed range of the equipment  
operation.  
The temperate shall range within -5°C ~ +50°C and the indoor temperature range of 18°C ~ 25°C is  
recommended. Too high temperature will do great harm to the equipment and long-term high  
temperature will accelerate the ageing of insulation materials, reduce the running stability of  
components and even affect the service life of the equipment.  
The humidity range shall range from 5% to 95%, preferably 20% ~ 60%. Too high humidity inside  
the equipment room may cause poor insulation performance of the insulation materials or even  
current leakage, which will cause short circuit or fire disaster. In addition, too high humidity will also  
cause changes of the mechanical performance of the materials, oxidization of the metal part and  
corrosion. However, too low humidity will cause the generation of static electricity.  
3.1.2.Cleanness Requirements  
Certain cleanness is required for the operating environment of the equipment and dust should be  
avoided as much as possible, because dust will cause harm to the safe running of the equipment.  
When dust falls down on the equipment body, it can cause static absorption and result in poor  
contact of the metal plug-ins or metal contact points, especially when the indoor RH is slightly  
lower. This will not only affect the service life of the equipment but also cause communication  
failure. Furthermore, the dust falling down on the optical interface of an interface module installed  
in the equipment will severely affect the interface data transmission or even cause transmission  
interruption. Therefore, dustproof measures must be taken for the equipment room where the  
equipment operates. It is recommended that the concentration of particles be less than 180 mg/ m3  
and such devices as printers and copying machines be place as far as possible from the  
equipment, so as to prevent paper scraps and ink powder from being absorbed into the equipment  
inside.  
3.1.3. Floor Requirements  
The equipment room floor shall first of all satisfy the bearing capacity requirement and it should be  
dust proof, fire proof, insulated and wearproof. The floor can be made of linoleum flooring, ethylene  
perchloride, resinous vanish or can be the anti-static raised floor. The antistatic floorboards should  
be tightly fit and robust, with the horizontal error no greater than 2mm per square meter. The  
ground or floor must be statically grounded and the resistance of the unit raised floorboards should  
accord with the Technical Specification for the Raised Floor in Computer Rooms. The floor can be  
connected to the grounding device via a current-limiting resistor and connection line.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 3-1 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
The load bearing capacity of the equipment room floor should be more than 450 kg/m2 (when  
storage batteries are contained in the cabinet). Considering the weight of the lead-acid battery, the  
load bearing capacity of the floor of the battery room should be more than 500 kg/m2 when  
equipped with the battery below 500AH and more than 600 kg/m2 when equipped with the battery  
above 800AH. The load bearing capacity of both the corridor and staircase should be 400 kg/m2  
(where there is no storage battery), with the overload coefficient being 1.4.The load bearing  
capacity of other places except for the equipment room should not be lower than 300 kg/m2. In  
case of old buildings, the load bearing capability should be improved if the indices do not satisfy the  
requirements.  
3.1.4. Heat Dissipation Requirements  
Good ventilation should be ensured for the operating environment of the equipment so as to meet  
the heat dissipation requirements of the internal components of the equipment. In particular,  
sufficient space (no less than 0.8 m) is required for both the front face and the rear face of the  
equipment at the place near the fans. Air inlet and outlet should not be blocked and weights are not  
permitted on the equipment.  
3.1.5.Power Supply Requirements  
When –48V DC power is adopted to supply power to 3P@C 4450E, the allowed variation of the  
voltage should be -36V ~ -72V when measured at the DC input terminal of each cabinet. When the  
conductor of the DC discharge loop is selected, the through voltage dip of the DC discharge loop  
should be no more than 0.5V and the core diameter of the DC power cable should be no less than  
16mm2.  
When AC power supply is adopted, reliable and stable AC mains power and lead-in wires should  
be selected. Since 3P@C 4450E consumes little power, it can adopt the 220V single-phase three-  
wire power supply system after conversion by the power transformation equipment. The  
specifications of the power cable should be calculated according to the equipment quantity and  
their power consumption, so as to meet the relevant specification requirements and taken into  
account sufficient security. In its full configuration, the 3P@C 4450E switch needs more than  
1200W power.  
3.1.6.Grounding Requirements  
When 3P@C 4450E is used in a large data communication office and is installed in a 19-inch  
cabinet with DC power supply, according to the General Technical Requirements (Provisional) for  
the Power Supply System of a Communication Office (Station) issued by the former Ministry of  
Posts and Telecommunications, the working ground, the protection ground of all communication  
equipment as well as the lightning protection ground of the building where the communication office  
of 3P@C 4450E is located should share a centralized grounding mode via a group of grounding  
devices, i.e. joint grounding mode.  
When AC power supply is adopted for 3P@C 4450E, the power sockets (as shown in Figure 3-1)  
using neutral point connectors are recommended and the neutral point of the power cable should  
be reliably grounded in the building. Generally during the engineering cabling of the building, the  
neutral points of the power supply system of the building have been buried and users should  
confirm if the power supply of this building has been reliably grounded.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 3-2 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 3-1 Recommended power sockets  
Neutral point  
Zero wire  
Live wire  
In order to ensure the definitely safe operation of the equipment, grounding in accordance with the  
grounding treatment requirements is needed. At the upper back of the 3P@C 4450E cabinet, one  
end of the grounding cable can be fixed and mounted at the grounding terminal while the other end  
can connect the protection ground of the equipment room, or it can be buried under the ground or  
connected to the grounding body inside the equipment room. The grounding resistance of the  
grounding body should be less than 1 ohm and copper conductors with good conductivity should  
be selected as the grounding cables with the section area no less than 16mm2.  
The following grounding requirements are posed for 3P@C 4450E:  
„
The grounding cables should be led into the equipment room by the horizontal  
grounding busbar of the vertical grounding bus in the joint grounding device. The  
grounding cable of each rack of the 3P@C 4450E equipment should be led into  
the nearest horizontal grounding bus.  
„
„
„
The DC power supply working ground of each rack in the 3P@C 4450E  
equipment should be connected from the grounding bus.  
Each rack equipment should have the working ground. The shell and cabinet  
should have the protection ground.  
The distribution frame should be connected with the protection ground via the  
grounding bus. Meanwhile, the distribution frame should not be electrically  
connected with the cabinet.  
„
„
All communication equipment in the equipment, except for the grounding cable  
close to the grounding bus, are not allowed to form the electrical connection by  
the installed fastening bolts touching the steel reinforcement in the building.  
The section area of the grounding cables (including the wires connecting the  
cabinets to be grounded/the grounding wires with the horizontal grounding  
busbars) should be determined on the basis of the possible maximum current  
load. The grounding cables should be made of good conductors (copper) and  
naked conducting wires are not allowed.  
„
„
The joint grounding resistance of the communication office where the 3P@C  
4450E is located should be less than 2 ohm.  
The metal parts (e.g., walls and reinforcing steel bars inside pillars) of the  
building itself should be preferably used as the downleads of the lightning  
protection ground, and such downleads shall be electrically connected with one  
another to balance the electric potential inside the building. The working ground  
of 3P@C 4450E should be far away from the power equipment or the grounding  
devices of the lightning protection ground as much as possible.  
„
„
The grounding terminals must undergo anti-corrosion and anti-rust processing.  
Meanwhile, the screws should all be tightened to ensure good contact.  
Do not lay down the grounding cables and signal cables in parallel or in a twisted  
manner to reduce their mutual interference.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 3-3 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
The basic requirement of grounding is that the grounding  
resistance should be little. During the engineering design, low-  
resistance grounding materials should be applied with sufficient  
length, width and thickness to ensure that 3P@C 4450E meets  
the grounding requirements. Ground piles can be buried deeply  
under the ground to form a flat surface there, so as to ensure low  
resistance for various frequencies. As the type of soil impacts the  
grounding resistance most, chemical agents (resistance-reducing  
agents) can be applied around the ground pile to reduce  
resistance for areas where the soil conditions are poor.  
Furthermore, the temperature and humidity of soil also have  
impact on the grounding resistance and this should also be  
considered during the engineering design.  
prompt  
3.1.7.Anti-interference Requirements  
Any interfering sources from the equipment or outside the applied system may affect the equipment  
in the capacitance coupling, inductance coupling, electromagnetic wave radiation, common  
resistance (including the grounding system) and the conduction mode of conducting wire (power  
supply line, signaling line and output wire). For this reason, note that:  
„
„
Take effective power anti-interference measures for the power supply system.  
Do not combine the working ground of 3P@C 4450E with the grounding device  
or the lightning grounding device of the power equipment but keep the distance  
between them as far as possible.  
„
„
Keep far away from any large-power radio transmitting station, radar transmitting  
station and high frequency strong current equipment.  
Take electromagnetic shielding measures when necessary.  
3.1.8.Other Requirements  
„
„
„
The indoor should be bright enough for operation, preferably 500 ~ 750  
lumen/m2.  
The equipment room should be attended by designated persons or have other  
burglar-proof measures.  
The water supply and draining systems of the equipment room should be  
designed in accordance with the normal water consumption and fire fighting  
regulations, and sufficient fire protection devices should be equipped.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 3-4 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
3.2. Safety Requirements  
3.2.1.Basic Safety Requirements  
To ensure the normal operation of the equipment and the human safety, please strictly obey the  
following security instructions during the operation:  
„
Carefully operate the equipment in accordance with the instructions given in this  
manual.  
„
„
„
Turn off the power before the equipment installation.  
Confirm whether the power supply is connected.  
Connect the power supply to a grounded socket to meet the European safety  
standards.  
„
Try not to place the power supply socket far away from the power inlet of the  
equipment, so that the power socket can be directly turned off without removing  
the power cable connected to the equipment in the case of power supply failure.  
Avoid any liquid contacting the equipment, lest short circuits or current leakage  
be caused.  
Never place the equipment near any heat source, lest the operation performance  
of the equipment be deteriorated or even the equipment be damaged. In  
addition, avoid direct sunshine on the equipment.  
„
„
„
„
Clean the equipment with soft and clean dry cloths and do not use any  
detergents.  
Do not wear any loose dress or jewelry (such as rings, necklace and bracelet).  
Preferably the sleeves should be rolled during the operation. Make sure that the  
installation of the switch on the rack will not entangle your clothes.  
3.2.2.Antistatic Requirements  
Many antistatic measures have been taken for 3P@C 4450E. However, if the static electricity in the  
environment exceeds a certain range, it will cause damage to the circuits or even the whole  
equipment; therefore, static electricity should be taken into account during the design of the  
equipment room environment. The static induction comes from two aspects: 1) outside electric  
field, such as high voltage power transmission lines and lightning stroke; 2) internal system, such  
as indoor environment, floor materials and equipment structure.  
Therefore, in order to avoid the damages caused by static electricity, please make sure to:  
„
„
„
„
Ground the equipment and the floor well;  
Keep the equipment room inside dust-proof;  
Maintain appropriate temperature and humidity conditions;  
The human static electricity can also damage the printed circuits and the internal  
components. Therefore, when you touch the circuit board or the extended  
module, please hold the edges of them instead of directly touching the circuits or  
components to avoid damage to them caused by human static electricity. Where  
necessary, wear an antistatic wrist strap and antistatic work uniform during the  
operation.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 3-5 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
3.2.3.Avoiding Laser Damage  
„
While the equipment installed with a fiber interface module is operating, please  
do not expose your eyes directly to these optical interfaces, lest the laser ray  
from the interfaces cause eye damage.  
„
„
It is suggested that protection covers for optical interfaces be placed on those  
optical interfaces if they are not in use.  
Wear safety glasses to protect your eyes if condition permits.  
3.2.4.Lightning Protection Requirements  
The equipment room building, if higher than 15 m, should be designed in accordance with the  
lightning protection requirements for Class II civil buildings and structures.  
During the anti-lightning design, measures should be taken to guard against the incursion of direct  
stroke and the lightning current. In the areas where lightning occurs frequently, there is also the  
phenomenon of side flash. So, some preventive measures against the side flash should be  
adopted according to the actual situation during the design. For example, connect the outer metal  
windows of the building with the lightning protection down lead. Along the height of the building, set  
horizontal metal lightning protection straps on the outer wall at a certain interval to prevent the  
lightning.  
The following lightning protection measures shall be taken for the main building body of the  
equipment room.  
„
„
„
Install anti-lightning nets or anti-lightning straps on the parts of the building that  
are subject to lightening.  
Equipment the protruding objects such as the chimney, antenna with an  
overhead conductor or arrester.  
Ensure the sectional area of the downlead of the anti-lightning device is no less  
than 2 mm2, and their spacing is no more than 30 m.  
The grounding resistance of the building’s lightning protection grounding device should be no more  
than 10 ohm. Before external cable and metal pipes etc. enter the building, they should be  
grounded. When outdoor aerial cables directly enter a room, lightning arrester should be installed  
at the point of entry. At the top of chimneys or antennas etc., lightning rods or lightning protection  
rings should be added. For buildings and structures, it is advisable to use the steel reinforcement of  
the reinforced concrete building slabs, beams, pillars and foundation as the discharge line for  
lightning-protection devices.  
In the past, the lightning protection ground of the building was separated from the ground of  
telecom and power supply systems, and large distances were required between various grounding  
devices. However, due to such reasons as small building sites, most of these requirements of  
distance were not satisfied. In fact, they can not be separated in many circumstances, so it is  
advisable to employ joint grounding systems for the lightning protection of the buildings. The joint  
grounding system connects the operating ground and protection ground for telecom use and the  
lightning protection ground of the building as well as the ground of the industrial frequency AC  
power supply system together. The grounding resistance of joint grounding should be quite high.  
Since the grounding resistance required for telecom is far less than 10 ohm, while the grounding  
requirements for various telecom equipments are different, the joint grounding resistance shall be  
determined according to the minimum resistance value of the various grounding devices.  
It is advisable to employ the metal components of the building itself (such as reinforcing steel bars  
inside walls and pillars) as the lead wires for lightning protection grounding, and these lead wires  
should be electrically connected, so that the electric potentials inside the building are equilibrated.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 3-6 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
To ensure the operation safety of the electrical interfaces on the  
equipment, lightning protection measures must be taken when  
the connection of the equipment involves outdoor cabling.  
Note  
3.2.5.Anti-seismic Design Requirements  
The quakeproof intensity of telecom equipment building should be designed one degree higher  
than local construction intensity. Those equipment buildings in short of quakeproof intensity  
requirements have to be strengthened. The construction departments should be invited to join the  
design and its execution.  
3P@C 4450E uses the following measures during the installation to withstand Richter 7  
earthquake.  
„
The 10U chassis of 3P@C 4450E uses light and strong aluminium alloy  
structure. There are locking devices to fix the circuit boards within the cabinets.  
When combining sever cabinets together in the installation, you can lock the top  
between the two cabinets by two cabinet-combining boards, so that the multiple  
cabinets are lined up to form integrity.  
„
„
Consolidate the reinforcement between the cabinet of 3P@C 4450E and the  
equipment room. Fasten the cabinet with the floor via its supports and feet.  
When necessary, fasten the cabinet with the ceiling to make the cabinet  
integrated with the equipment room framework.  
3.2.6.Fireproof Design Requirements  
The fireproof design of the equipment room should accord with the Code of Design on Building Fire  
Protection and Prevention issued by the state. As a key fire protection unit, any communication  
building shall have its fire-proof class reaching Class II and Class I (for high-rise buildings). In the  
equipment room of 3P@C 4450E, emergency fire extinguishers should be equipped and automatic  
fire alarm systems are recommended inside the equipment room.  
3.2.7. Precautions for Equipment Handling  
„
Preferably two or more persons are needed to move the equipment, lest the big  
weight of the equipment accidentally cause damage to the human body.  
Before dismounting or moving the equipment, cut off its power first.  
„
3.3. Installation Tools and Materials  
Unpack and inspect the equipment before installing it and place its components at a safe place.  
When moving parts, please wear gloves lest that any sweat should corrode the metal parts of the  
equipment.  
The following tools are needed to install 3P@C 4450E:  
„
„
„
„
One cross screwdriver  
One straight screwdriver  
One spanner  
One pair of hydraulic pliers  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 3-7 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
„
„
„
„
„
One pair of scissors  
One level bar  
One percussion drill  
One dust cleaner  
Anti-static wrist strap  
If the equipment is to be installed on the antistatic floor, an additional electric saw should be  
prepared before the formal installation.  
The following cables are needed for connection:  
„
„
„
„
Power cables  
Serial port console cables  
Grounding cables  
Network cables or fibers  
Others that are needed include:  
„
„
A computer with HyperTerminal software installed  
The modules to be installed  
3.4. Product Configuration List  
3.4.1.Basic Configuration of the Product  
Table 1-1 Basic configuration list of 3P@C 4450E  
Item  
1
Name  
3P@C  
Quantity  
1 PCS  
Description  
Including  
4450E-  
a
10U chassis,  
a
IPDSLAM-10U general  
chassis kit  
backplane, a fan module, a fan  
mounting support and an air  
deflector frame  
2
Accessories  
installation  
for 1 suite  
Including engineering labels, cable  
ties, screws and RS-232C console  
cables  
3
4
DC power cable  
Grounding cable  
1 PCS  
1 PCS  
Cut as required  
Cut as required  
3.4.2.Optional Components  
Table 1-2 List of the optional components for 3P@C 4450E  
Item Optional Component  
maximum  
configuration  
2
Accessories  
Needed  
-----  
1
2
3
Service Processor Unit Board  
(SMUB)  
VDSL Unit Board (VDUB)  
14  
A
suite  
subscriber cables  
suite of  
of  
ADSL Unit Board/Card (ADUB, 14  
ADUC)  
A
subscriber cables  
4
5
Route Transfer Unit (RTU)  
1-port gigabit long-wave single-mode 2×2  
interface module (DS-1GLX)  
1
-----  
-----  
6
7
8
1-port gigabit short-wave multi-mode 2×2  
interface module (DS-1GSX)  
4-port 100M electric interface module 2×2  
(DS-4TXB)  
-----  
-----  
-----  
VAS card (DS-4ITX)  
2×2  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 3-8 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Item Optional Component  
maximum  
Accessories  
configuration  
Needed  
9
2-port 100M multi-mode optical 2×2  
-----  
interface module (DS-2FMM)  
10  
11  
12  
2-port 100M single-mode optical 2×2  
interface module (DS-2FSM)  
1-port 155M long-wave single-mode 2×2  
ATM interface module (DS-A155SM)  
1-port 155M short-wave multi-mode 2×2  
ATM interface module (DS-A155MM)  
-----  
-----  
-----  
The maximum configuration quantity given in the above  
table is applicable to each general chassis of 3P@C 4450E.  
prompt  
3.5. Unpacking for Acceptance  
Keep the equipment waterproof and shock-proof during its  
transportation. After the equipment arrives at the destination  
for installation, do not handle it roughly but keep it away  
from sunlight and rain.  
Note  
3.5.1.Preparation  
1.1.1.29  
Checking the packages  
Before unpacking, check if the packing box is intact and if the equipment model is consistent with  
that specified in the purchase contract.  
If the packing box is damaged or the equipment model is  
inconsistent, please keep the original condition and contact  
the local office of SAGEM sa.  
Note  
1.1.1.30  
Unpacking tools  
The needed tools for unpacking include a claw hammer or screwdriver and an antistatic wrist strap.  
1.1.1.31  
Participants  
Both the customer and the engineering staff (engineers or representatives of SAGEM sa) should  
be present during the unpacking. Otherwise, any goods problem shall be borne by the unpacking  
party.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 3-9 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
1.1.1.32  
Storage environment requirements  
„
„
„
Temperature: 10°C ~ 30°C.  
Humidity: 30% ~ 70%.  
There should be basically vibration-free, low dust concentration and free of  
strong electromagnetic interference with good antistatic measures taken and  
wide site space.  
Preferably you should unpack inside or near the equipment  
room to avoid hard moving of the equipment or damaged to  
the equipment.  
prompt  
3.5.2.Unpacking  
1.1.1.33  
Packing box of the general chassis  
The assembly wooden box is used as the packing box of 3P@C 4450E. It is connected and fixed  
with plastic clips. Figure 3-2 shows its outside view.  
Figure 3-2 Appearance of the packing box  
Inside the packing box, there are packing materials such as foam pad, antistatic plastic bag and  
desiccants. The equipment is placed in the antistatic plastic bag. Its upper edge, bottom edge and  
all the corners are protected with the foam pads, and the foam pads are connected and fixed with  
paper boards, as shown in Figure 3-3:  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 3-10  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written  
permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 3-3 Packing structure of the equipment inside the packing box  
Air deflector frame  
Fan module  
Paper board  
Foam pad  
10U chassis  
Packing box  
The above figure indicates the structure of the packing box  
inside and shows the packing materials such as antistatic  
plastic bag and desiccant.  
prompt  
To unpack the packing box, take the following steps:  
Step 1  
Remove the outside packing materials.  
Place the packing box as indicated and use a claw hammer or  
screwdriver to remove the plastic clips around the top cover. The  
upper cover can be opened.  
Step 2  
Remove the equipment packing materials.  
Remove the packing materials (e.g. foam pads) on the equipment  
and carefully and smoothly draw out the equipment. Remove the  
packing plastic bag of the equipment.  
If the equipment is moved from a place with low temperature  
and low humidity to another place with high temperature and  
high humidity, you have to wait at least 30 minutes before  
unpacking it so as to avoid damages to the equipment  
caused by the moisture condensed on the equipment  
surface.  
Note  
Since the equipment is rather heavy, please operate it  
carefully and avoid colliding with human or articles. Raise  
and hold rigid places such as the rack base and skeleton to  
avoid damaging the equipment or any other accidents.  
Note  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 3-11  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written  
permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
1.1.1.34  
Packing box of accessories  
The packing box of accessories uses a small carton. Inside it there are a User Manual, a user  
registration/warranty card, an antistatic wrist strap, subscriber cables and suite of packing  
materials.  
1.1.1.35  
Packing box of boards  
The packing box of boards usually adopts a carton. Inside the packing box, there are packing  
materials such as foam pad, antistatic plastic bag and desiccants. After opening the carton, wear  
an antistatic wrist strap first before taking the board out of the antistatic bag.  
1. If a board is moved from a place with low temperature  
and low humidity to another place with high temperature and  
high humidity, you have to wait at least 30 minutes before  
unpacking it so as to avoid damages to the board caused by  
the moisture condensed on the board surface.  
Note  
2. You must wear an antistatic wrist strap before taking out  
the board to avoid damage.  
1.1.1.36  
Cabinet packing box  
The assembly wooden box is used as the packing box of the cabinet. It is connected and fixed with  
plastic clips. Figure 3-4 shows its outside view. Inside the packing box, there are packing materials  
such as foam pad, plastic bag, desiccant, cabinet, marking template and cabinet installation  
instructions. The cabinet is placed in the antistatic plastic bag. Its upper edge, bottom edge and all  
the corners are protected with the foam pads, and the foam pads are connected and fixed with  
paper boards. Inside the cabinet there are guide rails.  
Figure 3-4 Appearance of the cabinet packing box  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 3-12  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written  
permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
To unpack the packing box of the cabinet, take the following steps:  
Step 1  
Open the upper cover. Place the packing box as indicated and use a  
claw hammer or screwdriver to remove the plastic clips around the  
top cover. The cabinet is exposed.  
prompt  
Since the cabinet is rather heavy, three to four persons are  
needed to cooperate with one another in the unpacking  
process.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Erect the packing box and pull out the two cabinet feet. Erect the  
packing box to its normal position. Hold the packing box and  
carefully drag outward the cabinet from the side where the cover is  
removed, until the two cabinet feet are dragged out of the packing  
box. Remove the foam pads under the cabinet feet and place the  
cabinet feet on the floor.  
Slightly lean the packing box along with the cabinet towards the side  
where the cover is removed, and use the supports of the two cabinet  
feet on the floor to draw back the packing box from the reverse  
direction, as shown in Figure 3-5.  
prompt  
Since the equipment is rather heavy, please operate it  
carefully. Raise and hold rigid places such as the rack base  
and skeleton to avoid damaging the equipment or any other  
accidents.  
Figure 3-5 Draw out the packing box backward from the reverse direction  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 3-13 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written  
permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Step 4  
Step 5  
Remove the packing materials of the cabinet such as the  
plastic bag.  
Take out the marking template and the guide rails inside the  
cabinet.  
3.5.3.Goods Acceptance  
After unpacking, inspect and accept the goods against the contract and the packing list as follows:  
„
Appearance check: Check if the outer appearance of the equipment has any  
defect, looseness or damage, and if the identifying words are legible, and if the  
chassis boards and decorating plates are all installed and meet the requirements  
for use.  
„
„
Integrity check: Check if all the components and accessories needed for  
installation of the equipment are complete and matched.  
The engineering staff (engineers or representatives) of SAGEM sa should take  
the main responsibility for checking electrically sensitive devices and  
components.  
„
Lay out the inspected goods according to their different types. Keep the  
unpacked packing box at least till the user signs on the packing list.  
The following basic assemblies are contained inside the packing box of 3P@C 4450E:  
„
One set of 3P@C 4450E equipment (including a 10U chassis and the  
backplane)  
„
„
„
One fan module and one fan mounting support  
One air deflector frame  
One suite of installation accessories (including engineering labels, cable ties and  
screws)  
„
„
„
„
„
Suite of subscriber cables  
DC power cable  
One RS-232C console cable  
One User Manual  
User registration/warranty card  
The assemblies of the actual purchased equipment and the  
specific quantities of the components/accessories shall  
depend on the onsite packing list or the purchase contract of  
prompt  
the purchased equipment.  
If there is any product damaged or even lost in the box, contact the distributor or the most available  
salesmen of SAGEM sa. Also please keep away all the packing materials for future packing of the  
switch.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 3-14  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written  
permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 4  
4. Equipment Installation and Connection  
Do not take down the “no dismount” seal of SAGEM sa on  
the chassis of 3P@C 4450E without prior consent of  
SAGEM sa. This seal must be intact before the agent or  
engineer of SAGEM sa maintain the 3P@C 4450E  
equipment you have purchased. If you really need to  
dismount the chassis cover, please contact your agent to  
get the permission first. Otherwise, any consequences such  
as lack of maintainability caused by arbitrary operations  
shall be born by the user itself.  
Note  
Only qualified technicians are allowed to install and maintain 3P@C 4450E and these technicians  
must receive sufficient technical training or have rich installation and operation experience.  
Before installing 3P@C 4450E, check if the needed installation tools and materials are complete. Then remove  
the packing box of the equipment, take out the equipment and place in on the flat floor. Next, you can install the  
equipment in the following steps:  
To install 3P@C 4450E, take the following steps:  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Step 4  
Step 5  
Install the 19’’ standard cabinet 2.2 m high.  
Install the equipment.  
Connect the power and grounding cables.  
Install the Service Processor Unit Board (SMUB).  
Install the service cards such as ADUB, ADUC  
and VDUB.  
Step 6  
Step 7  
Step 8  
Install dummy panels.  
Connect the subscriber cables.  
Connect the console cable.  
4.1. Cabinet Installation  
By the specific equipment room environment, the 19-inch standard cabinet 2.2 m high can be installed on the  
cement floor or antistatic floor inside the equipment room. Figure 4-1 shows the flow chart of cabinet installation.  
Figure 4-1 Cabinet installation flow chart  
19'' cabinet  
installation  
The antistatic  
floor is available  
Installation on the  
antistatic floor  
Installation on  
the cement floor  
End the  
installation  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-1 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
The cabinet of 3P@C 4450E weighs about 150 kg and so  
two professional installers are needed to install it. The side  
of the rack shall not be less than 0.1 m away from the wall  
surface, and the back of the rack shall keep a space of more  
than 0.8 m from the wall surface and other equipments  
(including the operation console chairs/desks), so as to  
facilitate heat dissipation and equipment maintenance. The  
distance between the front face of one cabinet row and that  
of its adjacent row should be no less than 0.8 m.  
Note  
The equipment installation space is illustrated in Figure 4-2.  
Figure 4-2 Equipment installation space  
Inner wall or  
other barriers  
4-f60.0 (Feet  
position mark)  
4-f60.0 (Feet  
position mark)  
Use M12 expansion bolt  
Use M12 expansion bolt  
4.1.1.Installation on the Cement Floor  
The 19-inch cabinet 2.2 m high is installed on the cement floor by using pressure plates to press on the feet.  
Since the feet have the insulating function and the pressure plate assembly contains insulating parts, the whole  
equipment is insulated from the earth before the grounding cable is connected and the insulating requirements  
can be effectively satisfied. See Figure 4-3 for the installation flow.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-2 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 4-3 Flow of cabinet installation on the cement floor  
Installation on  
the cement floor  
Cabinet  
positioning  
Cabinet leveling  
Cabinet fixation  
Insulation test  
Test passed?  
End the  
installation  
1.1.1.37  
Position the cabinet  
A. Marking  
Decide the positions to install the expansion bolts according to the reference size and the positions of the feet in  
the construction plane design drawings. Determine the mounting hole positions of the 2.2m cabinet and locate  
the mounting hole positions of the feet with a marking template. (Note that the marking template is made of rigid  
paper boards, placed in the packing wooden box of the 2.2 m standard cabinet and delivered along with the  
cabinet). To avoid errors, repeat the measurement against the installation hole location diagram after all the hole  
positions have been marked and make sure their sizes are correct. Figure 4-4 shows the mounting hole layout of  
a single cabinet and Figure 4-5 shows that of two cabinets.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-3 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 4-4 Mounting hole positions for a single cabinet  
Inner wall or  
other barriers  
4-f60.0 (Feet  
position mark)  
Use M12 expansion bolt  
Figure 4-5 Mounting hole positions for two cabinets  
Inner wall or  
other barriers  
4-f60.0 (Feet  
position mark)  
4-f60.0 (Feet  
position mark)  
Use M12 expansion bolt  
Use M12 expansion bolt  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-4 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
B. Drilling  
Drill a hole in the place marking expansion bolts with a percussion drill. The drill bit should be Φ14 or Φ16.To  
drill a hole, keep the drill bit vertical with the surface and hold tightly the drill handle and do not shake, lest the  
surface be damaged and the hole be slanted. The depth of the hole should be the length of the expansion bush  
plus the cone. All holes must be consistent in the depth. Remove the dust out of the hole while measuring the  
hole depth in order to get the net depth. While drilling, use a cleaner to remove the dust.  
If the surface is too smooth and solid to locate the drill bit, you can cut a concave with a punching bit to help  
position the drill bit.  
When the Φ14 drill bit is selected but the hole diameter is small, enlarge the hole size through appropriate  
technical treatment.  
Marking and drilling are the basic work of the equipment  
hardware installation. If they are inaccurate, it will cause  
great inconvenience to the later work. So their quality is the  
Note  
prerequisite to the whole project quality.  
C. Install the expansion bolts  
Before the installation, use a cleaner to clean the inside and outside of all the holes and then measure the space  
between holes. For holes with large deviation, it is necessary to reposition and re-drill the holes. Take out the  
gasket and nut of the expansion bolt, place the expansion rod and expansion bush vertically into the hole and  
hammer the expansion bolt with a rubber hammer until it goes fully into the ground.  
1.1.1.38  
Level the cabinet  
A. Place the cabinet in position  
Place the cabinet in the planned position (note: The cabinet feet must be aligned with their position marks and  
the front/rear door positions of the cabinet should not be inversed. In the 2.2 m cabinet, the product label or  
nameplate is attached on the front door). Screw the nut at the root of the feet with a spanner so that the cabinet  
bottom face is 76 mm away from the floor and all cabinets are aligned with one another.  
B. Level the cabinet  
Place a horizontal ruler at the plane at the top of cabinet in two perpendicular directions, to check its horizontal  
level. Fine tune the cabinet feet so that the cabinet becomes level and then tighten the locking nuts of the  
cabinet feet.  
1.1.1.39  
Fix the cabinet  
A. Cabinet bottom fixation  
Put back the pressure plate assembly in the sequence as shown in Figure 4-6, so that the pressure plate  
presses against the cabinet feet and use a torque wrench to fasten the bolt of the pressure plate assembly to  
45Nm and thus fix the cabinet bottom. Figure 4-7 shows the effect after a single cabinet has been installed.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-5 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 4-6 Installation sequence of the pressure plate assembly  
Nut  
Feet  
Spring  
washer  
Pressure  
plate  
Flat washer  
Insulation  
sleeve  
Insulation pad  
Expansion bolt  
Cement floor  
Figure 4-7 Completion of the installation of a single cabinet  
When multiple cabinets are to be combined, the following  
installation steps shall be also taken.  
Note  
B. Cabinet top fixation  
When two or more cabinets are combined, the inter-cabinet connection is needed (note that the cabinet side  
panels do not need to be dismounted during the connection of the two combined cabinets). Figure 4-8 shows the  
position of the inter-cabinet connecting board before the cabinets are combined. Release the inter-cabinet  
connecting board of the cabinet on the right and install it in the way as shown in Figure 4-9. The effect upon  
completion of installing the cabinet is shown in Figure 4-10.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-6 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 4-8 The connecting boards before combining two cabinets side by side  
Figure 4-9 The connecting boards after combining two cabinets side by side  
Figure 4-10 Effect after the installation of two combined cabinets  
1.1.1.40  
Insulation test  
Set the multimeter to the resistor range to measure the resistance between the bolt of the pressure plate  
assembly and the cabinet. If the circuit is disconnected, end the installation. Otherwise, it indicates the cabinet is  
not insulated from the supports. In this case, remove all the pressure plate assemblies to check if any insulation  
sleeves or pads of the supports are missing or any insulation parts are damaged. Then install the pressure plate  
assemblies again and repeat the insulation test.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-7 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
4.1.2.Installation on the Antistatic Floor  
When the 19-inch cabinet 2.2 m high is installed on the antistatic floor of the equipment room, it shall use the  
A600 series supports. The cabinet is fixed by using pressure plates to press on the feet. Since the feet have the  
insulating function and the pressure plate assembly contains insulating parts, the whole equipment is insulated  
from the earth before the grounding cable is connected and the insulating requirements can be effectively  
satisfied.  
The purpose of the supports is to support the cabinet and facilitate the floorboard layout and cabling of the  
equipment. Each support is welded from steel plates and its installation shall be in the mode of floor brackets,  
that is, the floor is located between the cabinet and the supports and bolts thread through the antistatic floor to  
fix the cabinet with the supports, thus achieving the purpose of cabinet fixation and support.  
Figure 4-11 Appearance of the A600 series support  
Connection hole  
(used for 19'' cabinet)  
Connection hole  
(used for 19'' cabinet)  
Upper  
support  
Lower  
support  
Mounting  
hole  
There are four components of the A600 series support: Three with adjustable height and one with fixed height.  
The applicable height of the antistatic floor is from 260 mm to 410 mm.  
The height of ESD protection floor refers to the distance  
from the upper plane of the floor to the surface of the  
cement floor. The A600 series support components can  
implement steeples adjustment within their adjustable  
prompt  
ranges by means of the relative movement of the upper and  
lower supports.  
Each 19-inch cabinet uses two supports. Figure 4-12 shows the completed installation of a single cabinet on the  
antistatic floor:  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-8 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 4-12 Completion of the installation of a single cabinet  
Cabinet  
Antistatic  
floor  
Pressure  
plate  
Support  
Cement  
floor  
See Figure 4-13 for the installation flow.  
Figure 4-13 Flow of the cabinet installation on the antistatic floor  
Installation on the  
antistatic floor  
Cabinet  
positioning  
Support  
positioning  
Mounting support  
Cabinet leveling  
Cabinet fixation  
Insulation test  
Test passed?  
End the  
installation  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-9 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
1.1.1.41  
Position the cabinet  
A. Determine the cabinet installation position  
The position of the cabinet should be determined according to the benchmark sizes specified in the floor design  
of the equipment room. In determining the installation positions, avoid interference between the mounting  
support and the skeleton of the antistatic floor, i.e., try to keep the integrity of the floor skeleton. If such  
interference is inevitable, remove the skeleton of the floor board where the interference occurs. It is  
recommended that the center of the cabinet coincide with the center of the floorboard and all sides of the cabinet  
shall be symmetrical to the central symmetric line of the antistatic floor board. If multiple cabinets are to be  
installed side by side, the first cabinet should be arranged in this way.  
B. Marking  
Place the marking template of the cabinet (placed in the packing wooden box of the cabinet) on the antistatic  
floor according to the cabinet arrangement. The cabinet marking template is illustrated in Figure 4-14. Mark all  
the cabinet connection holes (four per cabinet) on the floor according to the marking template diagram, the feet  
position marks (four feet per cabinet) and the cabling hole positions. The semicircle gap of the template indicates  
the front direction of the rack. Mark the positioning and mounting holes of the supports on the cement floor.  
Make sure that the direction of the template is correct.  
Note  
Figure 4-14 Cabinet marking template  
4-f28 (Feet position mark)  
f14 Use M12 expansion bolt  
Back  
C. Drill holes in the anti-static floor  
Remove the marking template and drill a through-hole at each connection hole position on the antistatic floor  
using a percussion drill with the Φ20 drill bit. To drill a hole, keep the drill bit vertical with the antistatic floor and  
hold tightly the drill handle and do not shake, lest the hole be slanted.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-10  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Marking and drilling are the basic work of the equipment  
hardware installation. If they are inaccurate, it will cause  
great inconvenience to the later work. So their quality is the  
prerequisite to the whole project quality.  
Note  
D. Cut out the holes  
Cut out the through-holes with an electric saw on the antistatic floor according to the cabling hole marks.  
1.1.1.42  
Position the supports  
A. Mark lines on the cement floor  
Place the supports beneath the antistatic floor and align the connection holes on the supports to the holes on the  
antistatic floor. With the support mounting holes as the template, make the position marks of the expansion bolts  
on the floor.  
Strictly obey the method shown in Figure 4-15 to install the  
supports and make sure the connection holes at the inner  
side of the supports are aligned with the holes on the floor  
while preventing the supports from shielding the cabling  
holes as much as possible.  
Note  
Figure 4-15 Connection positions of the mounting holes for the support and the antistatic  
floor  
Connection hole  
Antistatic floor  
(inner side)  
Wire outlet of the floor  
B. Drill holes in the cement floor  
The support is fixed to the floor by means of expansion bolt M12. Normally a percussion drill is used to drill holes  
and the Φ14 orΦ16 drill bit is selected. To drill a hole, keep the drill bit vertical with the surface and hold tightly  
the drill handle and do not shake, lest the surface be damaged and the hole be slanted. The depth of the hole  
should be the length of the expansion bush plus the cone. All holes must be consistent in the depth. Remove the  
dust out of the hole while measuring the hole depth in order to get the net depth. While drilling, use a cleaner to  
remove the dust.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-11  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
1.1.1.43  
Install the supports  
A. Install the expansion bolts  
Before installation, use a vacuum cleaner to remove the dust inside and outside all the hole positions and then  
measure the distance between the holes. Place the supports inside the holes to see whether the holes match  
them. Do not mount the expansion bolt with large deviation to the holes. Instead, locate and drill the holes again.  
Take out the gasket and nut of the expansion bolt, place the expansion rod and expansion bush vertically into  
the hole and hammer the expansion bolt with a rubber hammer until it goes fully into the ground.  
B. Adjust the supports  
Roughly adjust the supports to their predefined height and fine tune the height-locking bolt of each support till the  
upper support will not automatically slip. Place the supports at their installation positions and thread the  
expansion bolts through the mounting holes on the supports.  
C. Fix the supports  
Align the holes on the antistatic floor with the connection holes on the support, screw in the bolts M12×70 from  
the top down, and place the pressure plate assemblies in the method shown in Figure 4-16. Slightly knock the  
supports with a rubber hammer and fine tune their height. Make the antistatic floorboard fall on the skeleton of  
the floor according to its original position and ensure that the upper surface of the supports is closely pressed  
against the antistatic floorboard. Then use a torque wrench to fasten the bolt of the pressure plate assembly, the  
expansion bolt and the height-locking bolt of the support all to 45Nm. In this process, fasten the bolts in the  
middle first before fastening the bolts at the two sides. Figure 4-17 shows the fastening of the bolts.  
Figure 4-16 Assembly chart of the pressure plate assembly  
Spring  
washer Φ 12  
Bolt M12x80  
Pressure  
plate  
Washer  
Support  
insulation sleeve  
Insulation  
pad  
The above procedure shall be strictly obeyed to fasten the  
above three groups of bolts.  
Note  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-12  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 4-17 Positions of the bolts to be fastened  
Bolt of the pressure  
plate assembly  
Wire outlet  
Antistatic floor  
Height-locking  
bolt (side)  
Height-locking  
bolt (middle)  
Expansion bolt  
Sequence of fastening the bolts: Bolt of the pressure  
plate assembly ¡ú Expansion bolt ¡úHeight-locking bolt  
(middle) ¡úHeight-locking bolt (side)  
1.1.1.44  
Fix the cabinet  
A. Level the cabinet  
Restore all the antistatic floorboards to their original state. Loosen all the bolts on the pressure plate assemblies  
and remove the pressure plate assemblies. Push the cabinet to the predefined position (the cabinet feet must  
coincide with their position marks) and screw the four feet with a spanner, so that the bottom surface of the  
cabinet is 73 mm away from the floor and all cabinets are aligned. Place a horizontal ruler at the plane at the top  
of cabinet in two perpendicular directions, to check its horizontal level. Fine tune the cabinet feet so that the  
cabinet becomes level and then tighten the locking nuts of the cabinet feet.  
B. Fix the cabinet  
Put back the pressure plate assembly again, so that the pressure plate presses against the cabinet feet and use  
a torque wrench to fasten the pressure plate assembly bolt to 45 Nm.  
Please skip Step C below to install a single cabinet.  
Note  
C. Cabinet top fixation  
When two (or more) cabinets are combined, it is necessary to connect the combined cabinets. Figure 4-8 shows  
the position of the inter-cabinet connecting board before the cabinets are combined. Release the inter-cabinet  
connecting board of the cabinet on the right and install it in the way as shown in Figure 4-9. Figure 4-18 shows  
the effect after two cabinets are combined.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-13  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 4-18 Completion of the installation of two combined cabinets  
1.1.1.45  
Insulation test  
Set the multimeter to the resistor range to measure the resistance between the bolt of the pressure plate  
assembly and the cabinet. If the circuit is disconnected, end the installation. Otherwise, it indicates the cabinet is  
not insulated from the supports. In this case, remove all the pressure plate assemblies to check if any insulation  
sleeves or pads of the supports are missing or any insulation parts are damaged. Then install the pressure plate  
assemblies again and repeat the insulation test.  
4.1.3.Installing the Cabinet Guide Rails  
Before installing the equipment, install the guide rails first inside the cabinet to bear the equipment. The  
installation steps are as follows:  
Step 1  
Determine the installation positions of guide rails.  
Determine the installation positions of the guide rails according to the quantity of the chassis to be installed, and  
the cabling direction. Measure the installation positions and mark them.  
Guide rails are needed to install the 10U chassis and the fan  
module, but not needed for the air deflector frame (it only  
needs hangers to get fixed).  
prompt  
Step 2  
Install the guide rails.  
After determining the installation positions, fasten the guide rails at such positions inside the cabinet with screws,  
as shown in Figure 4-19.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-14  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 4-19 Guide rail  
Guide rail  
Screw hole  
The front view of the installed guide rails is illustrated in the following figure.  
Figure 4-20 Front view of the guide rails installed  
4.2. Installing the Equipment  
3P@C 4450E must be installed in a cabinet. Since it is heavy and of a large volume, two persons are needed to  
cooperate with each other in the installation process. To install it, first install the 10U chassis, then the fan  
module and finally the air deflector frame. The specific procedure is as follows:  
4.2.1.Installing the 10U Chassis  
If the 10U chassis has been mounted with hangers, you can  
skip Step 1 and start the installation directly from Step 2.  
prompt  
Step 1  
Mount the hangers with screws provided in the installation  
accessories onto the 10U chassis, as shown in the following figure.  
In the process, make sure the hangers are mounted in the correct  
direction; otherwise the switch would not be able to be placed in  
the standard cabinet.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-15  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 4-21 Fixing the hangers onto the 10U chassis  
Hanger  
Side view of the  
installation  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Hold the two edges of the 10U chassis and slowly slide it inward  
from the front face of the rack, till the hangers bit the rack.  
Align the screw holes on the front face of the hangers with the  
screws on the rack and fasten them with screws to ensure the  
stability of the equipment, as shown in Figure 4-22.  
Figure 4-22 Insert the 10U chassis into the rack and fix it  
4.2.2.Installing the Fan Module  
The fan module should be installed below the 10U chassis in the following steps:  
Step 1  
Install the fan support and connect the hangers at the two  
sides of the fan support with screws, as shown in the following  
figure.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-16  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 4-23 Install the fan supports  
Step 2  
Install the fan module. Insert the fan module into the fan  
support and tighten the captive screws on the two sides after  
the fan module is in position, as shown in Figure 4-24.  
Figure 4-24 Install the fan module  
Captive screw  
Generally, the fan module delivered has already been  
mounted with hangers. If not, you can install the hangers  
first according to Step 1 above for the installation of the 10U  
chassis.  
prompt  
The fan module contains six DC fans that weigh about 3 kg. To make the replacement and cleaning of the fans  
much easier, the fan module of 3P@C 4450E is designed to be dismountable. As shown in Figure 4-25, a puller  
adapter is designed in the front face of the fan module. This puller adapter is closed when not in use. When it is  
needed to dismount, replace or clean the fans, please operate this puller adapter with both hands.  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Step 4  
Wear the antistatic wrist strap and insert its plug into the ESD  
socket in the front face of the 19-inch cabinet 2.2 m high.  
Cut off the system power supply of 3P@C 4450E before inspecting  
the fan module for a long while (more than 5 minutes).  
Loosen the fastening screws at the two sides of the fan module  
with a screwdriver.  
Press down the white left end of the puller adapter in the middle of  
the fan module panel. The puller adapter will automatically eject  
out, as shown in Figure 4-25.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-17  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 4-25 Operate the puller adapter  
Alarm LED  
Press  
inward  
Screw  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-18  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Step 5  
Drag the puller adapter to pull out the fan module by 10 cm from  
the chassis so that the fan module is detached from the internal  
power socket of the chassis.  
Step 6  
Step 7  
Wait for a minute till the fans fully stop running if you dismount the  
fan module without disconnecting the power supply.  
Hold the puller adapter of the fan module with the right hand, and  
fully pull out the fan module from the chassis with the left hand  
holding the bottom of the fan module.  
Step 8  
Place the removed fan module at a safe place.  
If you replace the fan module without cutting off its power on  
site, please install a new fan module as soon as possible  
after dismounting the fan module. Prepare the new fan  
module in advance and put it away in a safe place on site.  
Note  
4.2.3. Installing the Air Deflector Frame  
The air deflector frame should be installed tightly against the  
bottom of the fan module. It is forbidden to reserve  
unnecessary space between the air deflector frame and the  
bottom of the fan module.  
Note  
Method: Insert the air deflector frame tightly against the bottom of the fan module into the cabinet, and connect  
the hangers at the two sides of the air deflector frame with the cabinet by using screws, as shown in Figure 4-26.  
Figure 4-26 Install the air deflector frame  
Generally, the air deflector frame delivered has already been  
mounted with hangers. If not, you can install the hangers  
first according to Step 1 above for the installation of the 10U  
prompt  
chassis.  
Till now, a general chassis of 3P@C 4450E has been installed. Figure 4-27 shows the front view of the 3P@C  
4450E switch installed in the cabinet.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-19  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 4-27 Completion of the installation of a single general chassis  
Next, repeat the above operations to install multiple general chassis of 3P@C 4450E in the cabinet.  
1. When installing multiple general chassis of 3P@C 4450E  
in the cabinet, the installation of the first one in the cabinet  
can start from the top installation position or the bottom one  
of the cabinet.  
2. If upward cabling is adopted on site, the cabling should  
be arranged from the bottom up from the bottommost  
general chassis in the cabinet. Otherwise, the cabling  
should be arranged from the top down from the topmost  
general chassis in the cabinet.  
prompt  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-20  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
4.3. Connecting the Power and Grounding Cables  
4.3.1.Connecting the Power Cables of the Equipment  
The –48V DC power cables should be connected to the output control end and the wiring terminals on the  
cabinet. Its installation is shown in the following figure.  
Figure 4-28 Installation of the -48V DC power cables  
Cabling requirements for the DC power cable are given as follows:  
„
First connect the power supply system to the power input cable of the cabinet, and then  
connect the power distribution system to the output power cable of the equipment power  
supply.  
„
„
In the upward cabling of the system, the output branches shall be arranged from the top down.  
In the downward cabling of the system, the output branches shall be arranged from the bottom  
up.  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
The cables inside the cabinet shall not cross one another and they shall be sorted in order  
with different colors of the cables bound into different bundles.  
The surplus of the cables should be appropriate and the excessive cables should be cut away  
and re-processed rather than staying at the cabinet bottom or on the cabinet.  
The power cables should be connected to the output control end and the wiring terminals on  
the cabinet with both ends of such cables attached with labels 5 cm away from the cable root.  
After connecting the power cables, tighten all the screws (U screws) for fixing the cables at the  
back of the cabinet. No loose screw is allowed.  
In the processing of copper lugs, first crimp them, then solder them and finally put on the heat  
shrinkable tubing.  
Select the appropriate models of cable ties to bind the cables. The cable ties should fact the  
same direction and should be cut flat without sharp ends.  
The power cables should preferably installed from the wiring terminal of the first control switch.  
To connect the 220 V AC power supply, it is necessary to use the primary power supply system. Before  
connecting the power supply, check the power supply specifications carefully and ensure the correct power  
supply is connected so as to avoid any damage to the equipment. Furthermore, ensure that the power of the  
primary power system is no less than the power of the 3P@C 4450E switch in its full load, lest the power supply  
system be burned. Generally, the full-load power of the 3P@C 4450E switch shall be 60% ~ 70% of the power  
capacity of the primary power supply system.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-21  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
4.3.2.Connecting the Power Cable of the Fans  
The power cable connection of the fans is shown in the following figure.  
Figure 4-29 Power cable connection of the fans  
Fan alarm  
(yellow)  
(Blue)  
(Red)  
Fan power cable  
Fan module  
Air deflector frame  
(Red)  
Fan alarm  
(yellow)  
(Blue)  
After connecting the power cable of the fans, connect –48V DC power before trial run. The installation of the –  
48V DC power cable is shown in Figure 4-28.  
4.3.3.Connecting the Grounding Cables  
1.1.1.46  
Grounding cable connection of the equipment  
To ensure the safe equipment operation, make sure the equipment is well grounded. Connect the grounding  
point of the equipment and the PGND connection point of the DC distribution unit on the rack to ensure reliable  
grounding. At the same, connect the PGND of the DC distribution unit to the grounding point in the equipment  
room reliably with a grounding cable whose cross-sectional area is no less than 16mm2 to ensure reliable  
grounding of the rack. If the rack is poorly grounded, separate grounding protection measures should be taken  
for the equipment as follows: Take a wire, and connect one of its end to the grounding bolt on the equipment  
rear and the other end to the grounding terminal in the equipment room.  
1.1.1.47  
Grounding cable connection of the power supply  
The rack provides a grounding bolt “PGND”. PGND (protection ground) is the cabinet shell ground (earth).  
Connect the “PGND” wiring terminal on the cabinet to the “PGND” busbar of the DC distribution unit with a  
yellow-green power cable.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-22  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
4.3.4.Equipment Power Supply Test  
To ensure correct power supply for the equipment, it is necessary to try powering on the equipment with zero  
load and check if the fans work normally. If the fans work normally, cut the -48 V power, and proceed with the  
installation steps. When all the SMUBs and service boards are installed, power on the equipment again.  
Otherwise, repeatedly check whether the fan power and the -48 V DC power are correctly connected.  
4.4. Installing the Service Processor Unit Board (SMUB)  
The SMUB is used to implement the higher layer protocol processing and equipment management functions. It  
needs to communicate with the uplink data through the interface module. Since it does not contain any interface  
module or routing module, you may select these modules as required and install them on the SMUB.  
Before any operation, you must release the static electricity  
on your body. It is suggested to wear the antistatic wrist  
strap.  
Note  
4.4.1.Installing the Uplink Interface Modules  
Each SMUB can be installed with 2 uplink interface modules. To implement the interworking between the 3P@C  
4450E and the other networks, at least one uplink interface module should be installed. There are 4 screw holes  
on the SMUB corresponding to the installation position of an uplink interface module. They are used to fix the  
module, as shown in the following figure:  
Figure 4-30 Panel view of the SUMB  
Fix the nuts with  
screws from the  
rear of the SMUB  
Note: (1) (2) (3) are the screw holes to fix the uplink interface  
module, of which (3) and (4) need two additional nuts.  
(5) is the connection socket to fix the uplink interface module.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-23  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
To install the uplink interface module, take the following steps:  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Place the SMUB on a flat and stable insulating desktop, and  
remove the baffle plate in the position of the uplink interface.  
Take out the purchased uplink interface module from the packing  
box, fix two fixation copper bars and an interface board panel to  
the interface module with screws, insert the uplink interface of the  
uplink interface module into the uplink interface of the SMUB,  
align the pins of the interface module with the SMUB socket, and  
then push the pins into the socket with even force, as shown in  
Figure 4-31. Now the screw holes on the four corners of the  
interface board are aligned with the four screw holes on the  
SMUB. Get ready to install the screws.  
Figure 4-31 Insert the pins of the uplink interface module into the socket of the SMUB  
Rear side of the uplink  
interface module  
Connection socket  
Connect the uplink interface of  
the uplink interface module first  
SMUB  
Then align the pins of the uplink  
interface module with the SMUB socket  
and parallelly press them into the socket  
You should hold the edges of the module instead of  
touching the component or the printed circuits to avoid  
damage to the component caused by human static  
Note  
electricity.  
Step 3  
Fix the module with the special-purpose screws used to install  
the uplink interface module, as shown in Figure 4-32.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-24  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 4-32 Fix the uplink interface module with screws  
Uplink interface  
module  
SMUB  
Uplink interface  
module  
SMUB  
By now, the uplink interface module is installed.  
The method for removing the uplink interface module is similar to the installation method. Only the procedure is  
reverse.  
4.4.2.Installing the RTU  
Each SMUB can be installed with an optional RTU module (please refer to Section 2.6 for the selection of RTU).  
The RTU does not provide any external interface. It only provides the L3 routing and flow table functions for the  
SMUB. There are 4 screw holes and a connection socket on the SMUB corresponding to the installation position  
of the RTU, as shown in Figure 4-33:  
Figure 4-33 Installation position of the RTU  
Connection  
Screw hole  
socket  
RTU module  
Uplink  
interface  
module  
Uplink  
interface  
module  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-25  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
To install the RTU, take the following steps:  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Place the SMUB on a flat and stable insulating desktop.  
Take out the purchased RTU module from the packing box, align  
the pins of the RTU with the SMUB socket, and then push the  
pins into the socket with even force, as shown in Figure 4-34.  
Now the screw holes on the four corners of the RTU are aligned  
with the four screw holes on the SMUB. Get ready to install the  
screws.  
Figure 4-34 Insert the pins of the RTU into the socket of the SMUB  
Align the pins of the RTU module with the SMUB  
socket and parallelly press them into the socket  
SMUB  
You should hold the edges of the module instead of  
touching the component or the printed circuits to avoid  
damage to the component caused by human static  
Note  
electricity.  
Step 3  
Fix the module from the rear of the SMUB with the special-  
purpose screws used to install the RTU, as shown in Figure 4-35.  
Figure 4-35 Fix the RTU with screws  
RTU  
module  
SMUB  
By now, the RTU module is installed.  
The method for removing the RTU is similar to the installation method. Only the procedure is reverse.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-26  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Generally, the screws and nuts have been installed on the  
four corners of the purchased RTU module, as shown in  
Figure 4-36. If no screw or nut is installed on the four  
corners of the purchased RTU module, then you should first  
install the screws and nuts, and then install the RTU on the  
SMUB.  
prompt  
Figure 4-36 Rear view of the RTU installed with screws and nuts  
Rear side of  
Installed nut  
the RTU  
4.4.3.Installing the SMUB  
Before installing the SMUB, you should first install the uplink interface module and the RTU (optional).  
To install the SMUB, take the following steps:  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Cut off the power supply before the installation.  
Make sure that 3P@C 4450E is well grounded and the operator  
wears an antistatic wrist strap.  
Step 3  
Step 4  
Remove the dummy panel installed in the slot of the SMUB by  
removing the screws.  
Take out the SMUB, align it with the slot, press the two puller  
adapters outward with both hands, and push the SMUB along the  
guide rail into the slot with even force till the SMUB touches the  
connection socket on the backplane.  
Step 5  
Press the two puller adapters of the SMUB inward with both  
hands to plug the SMUB into the connection socket on the  
backplane. Now the two puller adapters are reset automatically.  
Tighten the two screws on the puller adapters to fix the SMUB.  
Figure 4-37 Installation of the SMUB  
Connection  
socket  
Place one hand on the upper puller  
adapter and the other hand on the lower  
puller adapter of the SMUB, and push the  
SMUB slightly inward along the guide rail  
Guide rail  
Backplane  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-27  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Although 3P@C 4450E supports hot plugging, to prolong  
the life span of the equipment and the modules, try not to  
plug/unplug the equipment or the modules with power on.  
Note  
4.4.4.Connecting the Ethernet Interfaces of SMUB  
The SMUB of 3P@C 4450E has an RJ-45 Ethernet interface (10/100Base-TX interface). In addition, the uplink  
interface sockets on the SMUB can be installed with the uplink interface module DS-4TXB/DS-4ITX which  
provides 4 RJ-45 Ethernet interfaces. The RJ-45 network interface provided by 3P@C 4450E has the interface  
polarity automatic calibration function. It can be connected to the other network devices by the C5 UTP  
(Unshielded Twisted Pair) or STP (Shielded Twisted Pair).  
1.1.1.48  
RJ-45 connector  
Figure 4-38 RJ-45 connector  
Figure 4-38 shows the appearance of the RJ-45 connector and arrange of pins. Table 4-1 show the functions of  
the RJ-45 connector pins in MDI mode, while Table 4-2 shows the functions of the RJ-45 connector pins in the  
MDIX mode.  
Table 4-1 Pinouts of the RJ-45 MDI interface  
Pin No.  
Signal  
Function  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TxData+  
TxData-  
RxData+  
Reserved  
Reserved  
RxData-  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Transmit data  
Transmit data  
Receive data  
Receive data  
Table 4-2 Pinouts of the RJ-45 MDIX interface  
Pin No.  
Signal  
Function  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RxData+  
RxData-  
TxData+  
Reserved  
Reserved  
TxData-  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Receive data  
Receive data  
Transmit data  
Transmit data  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-28  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
1.1.1.49  
Preparing the network cables  
A Category 5 twisted pair is made up of 8-core thin wires. They are identified into groups by the color of the  
external insulation layer of the thin wires. In general, a single color and a single color plus white are used to  
identify a twisted pair, or color dots are sometimes used for paired identification. According to this method of  
identification, the eight-core thin wires of a Category 5 twisted pair can be divided into four pairs: Orange &  
orange/white, blue & blue/white, green & green/white, brown & brown/white.  
Usually there are two kinds of Ethernet cables connecting the two Ethernet devices: Straight-through cable and  
crossover cable. Figures 4-39 and 4-40 show respectively the connection methods of a straight-through cable  
and a crossover cable. Selection shall be based on the application requirements. In the figures, "SIDE1" and  
"SIDE2" indicate the two ends of the network cable respectively while numbers "1 ~ -8" represents the line  
sequence at the two ends.  
Figure 4-39 Illustration of making a straight-through cable  
Pinouts of a straight-through cable  
Illustration  
Orange/white  
Orange  
Orange/white  
Orange  
Green/white  
Blue  
Green/white  
Blue  
Blue/white  
Green  
Blue/white  
Green  
Brown/white  
Brown  
Brown/white  
Brown  
Figure 4-40 Illustration of making a crossover cable  
Pinouts of a crossover cable  
Illustration  
Orange/white  
Orange  
Green/white  
Green  
Orange/white  
Blue  
Green/white  
Blue  
Blue/white  
Blue/white  
Green  
Orange  
Brown/white  
Brown/white  
Brown  
Brown  
1.1.1.50  
Ethernet interface connection  
Connect one end of the twisted pair that uses RJ-45 connectors at both ends to the Ethernet interface of the  
SMUB, and the other end to the Ethernet interface of the other Ethernet-compatible device in the LAN, as shown  
in Figure 4-41:  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-29  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 4-41 Ethernet interface connection of the SMUB  
Twisted pair  
Connect the peer  
equipment  
4.4.5. Connecting the Optical Interfaces of SMUB  
The SMUB of 3P@C 4450E supports the 100M/1000M uplink optical interface module and the ATM uplink  
optical interface module. The standard SC fiber connectors shown in Figure 4-42 are adopted for these optical  
interfaces.  
Figure 4-42 SC optical connector  
When connecting an optical interface, note that the fiber specifications must be consistent with the features of  
the uplink optical interface. For example, if the optical interface is a multi-mode interface, the multi-mode fiber  
should be used. And when the optical interface is a single-mode interface, the single-mode fiber should be used.  
Also you should make clear the transceiving polarity of the optical fiber interface. The 3P@C 4450E uses  
standard SC fiber connectors. During the optical interface connection, the fiber with SC connectors at both ends  
should be used. If one end of the fiber connects with the Rx-Tx interface of the uplink optical interface of the  
3P@C 4450E switch, then the other end should be connected to the Tx-Rx optical interface of the peer  
equipment. That is, the Rx interface of the uplink optical interface corresponds to the Tx optical interface of the  
peer switch, while the Tx interface of the uplink optical interface corresponds to the Rx optical interface of the  
peer switch.  
Figure 4-43 shows the connection of the uplink optical interface of 3P@C 4450E:  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-30  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 4-43 Uplink optical interface connection  
For the descriptions of fibers, please refer to the contents in  
Appendix C.  
prompt  
4.5. Installing the Subscriber Service Cards  
The method and procedure for installing the ADUB/ADUC/VDUB are the same as those of the SMUB. Please  
refer to Section 4.4.3.  
4.6. Installing the Dummy Panels  
Dummy panels should be installed in the slots where no subscriber service boards or SMUBs are inserted so as  
to keep the integrity of the air duct of the 10U chassis, ensure the reliable heat dissipation of the system and the  
good electromagnetic compatibility of the equipment, and meet the dustproof requirements.  
To install a dummy panel, take the following steps:  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Take out a dummy panel, hold both ends of it with both hands,  
and place it in an empty slot.  
Press the dummy panel with one hand, and insert screws in the  
holes on the dummy panel with the other hand.  
Tighten the screws to end the installation.  
The installation is shown in the following figure:  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-31  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 4-44 Install a dummy panel  
Front face  
Side face  
The width of the dummy panel in the slot of the SMUB is  
greater than the width of the dummy panel in the slot of the  
subscriber service board. The dummy panel in the slot of the  
subscriber service board is fixed by 2 screws, while that in  
the slot of the SMUB is fixed by 4 screws.  
prompt  
4.7. Connecting the Subscriber Cables  
The rear leading-out mode is adopted for the ADSL/VDSL subscriber cables of 3P@C 4450E. The special-  
purpose 3*8 cable connectors are used to connect with the DIN connectors on the rear panel. The subscriber  
cables are divided into two types: LU connection subscriber cables and LC connection telephone switch cables.  
The connector of the LU subscriber cable has 3 marks: UP X1, UP X2 and UP X3, which are connected on the  
DIN connector on the backplane from the top down in the sequence of UP X1, UP X2 and UP X3. The connector  
of the LC telephone switch cable has 3 marks: DOWN X1, DOWN X2 and DOWN X3, which are connected to  
the DIN connectors in the lower row on the backplane from the top down in the sequence of DOWN X3, DOWN  
X2 and DOWN X1. LU and LC subscriber cables are installed on the DIN connectors on the backplane (as  
shown in Figure 4-45). The pinouts of the LU subscriber cable are shown in Figure 4-46 and Table 4-3, while the  
pinouts of the LC telephone switch cable are shown in Figure 4-47 and Table 4-4.  
The connector of the LU subscriber cable is plugged from  
the upper part of the connector in the upper row, while the  
connector of the LC subscriber cable is plugged from the  
prompt  
lower part of the connector in the lower row.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-32  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 4-45 Installation of the LU and LC subscriber cables on the backplane  
Connection sequence of  
the DIN connector  
Figure 4-46 Pinouts of the LU subscriber cable  
Label 1  
Cable tie  
Pinouts of the LU subscriber line  
Main  
label  
Heat shrink  
L=20  
Direction A  
Label 2  
Label 3  
Table 4-3 Pinouts of the LU subscriber cable  
Connector X1 Connector X2  
Connec Colo Identif Subscr Connect Color  
Identificati Subscrib  
tor X1  
r
ication iber  
No.  
or X2  
on  
er No.  
C1  
C2  
Pink  
Red*  
Black**  
*
1
2
3
4
5
C1  
C2  
Green  
Blue  
Red***  
Black***  
13  
B1  
B2  
Oran Red*  
ge  
B1  
B2  
Red***  
Black***  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Black**  
*
A1  
A2  
Gree Red*  
n
A1  
A2  
Grey  
Pink  
Red***  
Black***  
Black**  
*
Red*  
Black**  
*
C3  
C4  
Blue  
C3  
C4  
Red****  
Black  
B3  
B4  
Grey Red*  
B3  
B4  
Orange Red****  
Black  
Black**  
*
A3  
A4  
C5  
Pink  
Red***  
Black**  
6
7
A3  
A4  
C5  
Green  
Blue  
Red****  
Black  
Red****  
18  
19  
Oran Red***  
ge  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-33  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
C6  
B5  
B6  
A5  
A6  
C7  
C8  
B7  
B8  
Black**  
Gree Red***  
C6  
B5  
B6  
A5  
A6  
C7  
C8  
B7  
B8  
Black  
Red****  
Black  
Red* (full)  
Black* (full)  
8
9
Grey  
Pink  
20  
21  
22  
23  
n
Blue  
Black**  
Red***  
Black**  
Grey Red*** 10  
Black**  
Orange Red* (full)  
Black* (full)  
Red* (full)  
Black* (full)  
Pink  
Red*** 11  
Black**  
*
Green  
Blue  
A7  
A8  
Oran Red*** 12  
A7  
A8  
Red* (full)  
Black* (full)  
24  
ge  
Black**  
*
Connector X3  
Label printing  
Connec Colo Identif Subscr L a b e l  
Main label  
Label Label Label  
tor X3  
C1  
r
ication iber  
No.  
1
2
3
Label  
printing  
Grey Red*  
(full)  
25  
xxxxxx  
xx  
UP  
X1  
UP  
X2  
UP X3  
L=XXX  
C2  
Black*  
(full)  
Label  
type  
Paste  
mode  
B1  
B2  
A1  
A2  
C3  
C4  
B3  
B4  
A3  
A4  
C5  
C6  
Pink  
Red I  
Black I  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
HB11  
Roll  
HB03 HB03 HB03  
Flat Flat Flat  
Oran Red I  
ge  
Gree Red I  
n
Blue  
Black I  
Black I  
Red I  
Black I  
Grey Red I  
Black I  
Pink  
Red II  
Black  
II  
B5  
B6  
Blue  
Red II  
Black  
II  
32  
Figure 4-47 Pinouts of the LC telephone line  
Label 1  
Pinouts of the LC telephone line  
Cable tie  
Heat  
Main  
label  
shrink  
L=20  
Direction A  
Label 2  
Label 3  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-34  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Table 4-4 Pinouts of the LC telephone line  
Connector X1  
Connector X2  
Connec Colo Identifi  
Subsc Connect  
Colo  
r
Identificati Subscri  
tor X1  
r
cation  
riber  
No.  
1
or X2  
on  
ber No.  
C1  
C2  
B1  
Pink  
Red*  
Black***  
C1  
C2  
B1  
Gree  
n
Blue  
Red***  
Black***  
Red***  
13  
Oran Red*  
ge  
2
14  
B2  
A1  
A2  
C3  
C4  
B3  
B4  
A3  
A4  
C5  
C6  
B5  
B6  
A5  
A6  
C7  
C8  
B7  
B8  
A7  
A8  
Black***  
Gree Red*  
B2  
A1  
A2  
C3  
C4  
B3  
B4  
A3  
A4  
C5  
C6  
B5  
B6  
A5  
A6  
C7  
C8  
B7  
B8  
A7  
A8  
Black***  
Red***  
Black***  
Red****  
Black  
Red****  
Black  
Red****  
Black  
Red****  
Black  
Red****  
Black  
Red* (full)  
Black* (full)  
Red* (full)  
Black* (full)  
Red* (full)  
Black* (full)  
Red* (full)  
Black* (full)  
3
Grey  
Pink  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
n
Blue  
Black***  
Red*  
4
Black***  
Grey Red*  
Black***  
5
Oran  
ge  
Gree  
n
Pink  
Red***  
Black**  
6
Oran Red***  
ge  
Gree Red***  
7
Blue  
Black**  
8
Grey  
Pink  
n
Blue  
Black**  
Red***  
Black**  
9
Grey Red***  
Black**  
10  
11  
12  
Oran  
ge  
Gree  
n
Pink  
Red***  
Black***  
Oran Red***  
ge  
Connector X3  
Blue  
Black***  
Label printing  
Connec Colo Identifi Subscr L a b e l  
Main label  
Label  
1
Label Label  
tor X3  
r
cation  
iber  
No.  
25  
2
3
Label  
printing  
C1  
Grey Red*  
(full)  
xxxxx DOW  
DOW DOW  
N X2 N X3  
xxx  
L=XX  
X
N X1  
Black*  
(full)  
C2  
Label  
type  
Paste  
mode  
B1  
B2  
A1  
A2  
C3  
C4  
B3  
B4  
A3  
A4  
C5  
C6  
B5  
B6  
Pink  
Red I  
Black I  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
HB11 HB03  
HB03 HB03  
Flat Flat  
Oran Red I  
ge  
Gree Red I  
n
Blue  
Roll Flat  
Black I  
Black I  
Red I  
Black I  
Grey Red I  
Black I  
Pink  
Red II  
Black II  
Red II  
Blue  
Black II  
The pinouts of the VDSL subscriber cable are the previous  
24 pins.  
prompt  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-35  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Note the following requirements when connecting the subscriber cables:  
„
The cabling boards in the middle should be fully utilized and the binding should be neat and  
make preparations for later expansion.  
„
The cabling should be on the right primarily to ease cable installation and future cable  
expansion.  
„
„
„
„
Pay attention to the angle when inserting the cables into sockets. Do not bend the pins.  
The cables should be bound in order and uniformly.  
The sockets not plugged with any cable must be installed with claw locks to avoid loss.  
Try to separate the power cables, working ground cables and protection ground cables from  
the subscriber cables.  
The techniques for binding the subscriber cables are as follows:  
„
The cables of the racks should be bound orderly, clearly and neatly. Bind the cable ties in a  
round shape, and route the cables from the cabling holes on the flank of the rack to the rear  
side of the rack before upward cabling or downward cabling. For a nice appearance, all the  
cables should be arranged to both sides along the beams of the frames and led out along the  
sides. The cable ties should be spaced evenly and bound properly. Excessive length of the tie  
heads should be cut off so that the cable tie heads all have the same length.  
Cables from the cabinet to the distribution frame should be bound and then placed neatly and  
closely.  
When supports and antistatic floorboards are installed for the equipment, it is recommended to  
lay the cables in the method of downward wiring for easy and nice layout. If no support is  
installed for the equipment, the cables should be laid by means of upward wiring. In this case,  
cabling racks should be provided above the cabinet. When upward wiring is adopted, cables  
should be laid through the cabling racks or cabling troughs on top of the rack.  
The size, route, cross-sectional area and position of the distributed cables should be in  
compliance with the requirements specified in the construction drawings. All cables should be  
laid neatly, without crossover or skin damage.  
„
„
„
„
„
The subscriber cables should be laid separately from the power supply cables.  
The bending radius of cables should be no less than 40 mm to protect the wire core from  
being damaged, as shown in Figure 4-48.  
„
„
The insulation layer of the cable should not be damaged. The routing of cables should  
facilitate maintenance and future expansion.  
Cables routed in the cabling racks should be bound and arranged neatly and closely. The  
cable ties should be spaced evenly and bound properly. If twines are used for binding, they  
should be waxed.  
„
„
Cables laid in a wiring trough may be bound or not bound. But they should be laid out neatly  
without crossover and should not run beyond the trough. The cables should be tied when led  
in and led out of the trough or when converting to another direction.  
The labels made by SAGEM sa are used to number both ends of a cable. They are placed 20  
mm away from the plugs.  
Figure 4-48 Cable bending and binding  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-36  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
As sho As shown in Figure 4-48, cable ties cannot be  
applied in the bending position shown in (1) on the left,  
and the correct application of the cable ties is shown in  
(2) on the right.  
prompt  
The cable binding is shown in Figure 4-49 and Figure 4-50:  
Figure 4-49 Single binding  
Figure 4-50 Double binding  
4.8. Connecting the Console Cable  
The 3P@C 4450E switch provides RS-232C interface (Console interface) of the RJ-45 type, via which the switch  
can be connected to the terminal console PC with a console cable. The console cable is an 8-core cable, with an  
RJ45 connector at one end for connecting to the console interface of the switch and DB9 plug at the other end  
for connecting to the terminal console. The console cable and the console interface are connected as shown in  
Figure 4-51. After the connection, you can configure the switch through command lines at the terminal console  
for outband management.  
For the description of the RJ-45 connector, please refer to  
Section 4.4.4.  
prompt  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-37  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 4-51 Console interface connection  
Console cable  
Connect the  
console interface  
Connect the PC  
serial port  
Then start the HyperTerminal on the PC: Start → Programs → Accessories → Communications →  
HyperTerminal. Install the HyperTerminal through the control panel if it has not been installed. For the  
HyperTerminal installation method, please refer to the Help information in Windows.  
Start the HyperTerminal. If it is started for the first time, you will be required to input a name and select an icon,  
as shown in Figure 4-52.  
Figure 4-52 Input the connection name and select an icon for it  
Click <OK> to select the serial port to be connected. Note that the serial port selected must be consistent with  
the one used by your PC.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-38  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 4-53 Select the connecting serial port  
Then set the parameters such as the communication rate, as shown in Figure 4-54.  
Figure 4-54 Communication parameter setting  
You must set them as follows:  
„
„
„
„
„
Baud rate – 9600  
Data bit - 8  
Stop bit - 1  
Parity bit – None  
Flow control – None  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-39  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Click the Properties item under the File menu of the HyperTerminal, and click Settings in the pop-up window, as  
shown in Figure 4-55:  
Figure 4-55 Select the terminal emulation type  
Set the terminal type as VT100.  
If the switch has been started (automatically upon power-on), you can conduct the related operations now. Click  
Dial in the toolbar to log in to the system.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 4-40  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 5  
5. Suggestions to Ethernet Cabling  
To lessen the possibility of equipment damage and performance deduction due to electromagnetic wave and  
lightning interference, the following recommendations are offered for 100 Mbps Ethernet port cabling in actual  
engineering:  
5.1. Requirements for Cable Types  
Cables for 100 Mbps Ethernet port connection must be Category-5 or Enhanced Category-5 cables. On the  
surface of the twisted pair, you can often find some symbols like “ 24AWG CAT5”. “CAT5” represents  
Category-5 twisted pairs and “CAT5E” represents Enhanced Category-5 twisted pairs.  
5.2. Requirements for Cabling Length  
Length of 100 Mbps Ethernet cabling cannot exceed 100 meters, that is to say, the cable length from a device to  
a networking device or subscriber’s PC must be not more than 100 meters, as shown in the figure below.  
Cabling length of more than 100 meters influences effective transmission of data.  
Figure 5-1 Requirements for cabling length  
Device  
Ethernet  
cable  
Ethernet  
cable  
Subscriber’s PC  
Interconnected  
device  
5.3. Spacing Requirements for Indoor Cabling  
To keep effective data transmission and lessen interference of coupling high-frequency electromagnetic wave  
and lightning, it is recommended that in indoor cabling, Ethernet cables should keep an appropriate spacing from  
other pipelines and nearby electric equipments such as electromotor and transformer that may cause high-  
frequency electromagnetic interference. For the spacing requirements for indoor cabling, see 0 and 0.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 5-1 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Table 5-1 Requirements of spacing between Ethernet cables and cables of other electric  
devices  
Cable type  
Laying mode  
Minimum parallel  
net spacing L(mm)  
380 V power Parallel laying  
cable  
130  
One side is placed in a grounded 70  
<2kV.A  
metal trough or steel tube.  
Both sides are placed in a grounded 10  
metal trough or steel tube.  
380 V power Parallel laying  
cable  
300  
One side is placed in a grounded 150  
metal trough or steel tube.  
2 – 5kV.A  
Both sides are placed in a grounded 80  
metal trough or steel tube.  
380 V power Parallel laying  
cable  
600  
One side is placed in a grounded 300  
metal trough or steel tube.  
>5kV.A  
Both sides are placed in a grounded 150  
metal trough or steel tube.  
If the spacing length between a 380 V power cable (<2kV.A)  
and a Ethernet cable is not more than 10 m with both placed  
in a grounded trough, the minimum parallel net spacing can  
be 10 mm.  
Prompt  
Table 5-2 Requirements of spacing between the Ethernet cables on the wall and other  
pipelines  
Minimum parallel net Minimum net spacing  
spacing L(mm)  
between crossed cable  
and line H(mm)  
Other pipelines  
Ethernet cable  
Ethernet cable  
300  
Cable  
conducting  
lightning to the  
ground  
for 1000  
protection  
grounding  
50  
20  
Water supply pipe  
150  
20  
20  
Compressed  
pipe  
air 150  
Thermo pipe (non- 500  
enveloped)  
500  
300  
20  
Thermo  
pipe 300  
(enveloped)  
Gas pipe  
300  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 5-2 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
The following figure shows the parallel and crossed net spacing between Ethernet cable and other pipelines:  
Figure 5-2 Parallel and crossed net spacing  
H
L
In certain sections, if the Ethernet cable is parallel with the  
power cable or near interference sources such as  
electromotor and transformer, and the minimum net spacing  
between them cannot address requirements, you can use  
steel tube or metal trough to shield the Ethernet cable.  
Note  
5.4. Several Forbidden Overhead Cabling Methods  
Because outdoor overhead cabling is easy to couple up lightning and damage equipments, it is forbidden to use  
the outdoor overhead Ethernet cabling, especially use the following cabling methods directly without any  
protection measures.  
Figure 5-3 Direct overhead cabling between two buildings without any protection (1)  
Figure 5-4 Direct overhead cabling between two buildings without any protection (2)  
Figure 5-5 Direct overhead cabling between two buildings without any protection (3)  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 5-3 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 5-6 Direct overhead cabling from the outdoors of the top of a buildings to the  
bottom floor without any protection  
5.5. Other Requirements for Outdoor Cabling  
When connecting devices located in different buildings, you  
are recommended to use optical cables for overhead cabling,  
Note  
and don’t need to install any lightning arrestor.  
If you cannot provide the optical fiber cable for outdoor cabling and have to use the twisted pair, pay attention to  
the following cabling requirements:  
If the shielding of Ethernet cables is required outdoors, you need to do as follows: Parallelize a steel wire outside  
the PVC pipe and connect the wire with the lightning protection grounding of the building, in this way the  
inductive lightning can be conducted the to the ground through the steel wire.  
The Ethernet cables entering a building must be laid in a weak electricity metal rack or tube. The metal rack or  
tube serves as the shielding layer of the cable and should be connected appropriately with integrated grounding  
system. Note that the weak electricity conducting cable cannot share metal rack or tube with the strong electricity  
conducting cable.  
If you cannot provide the optical fiber cable for outdoor  
cabling and have to use the twisted pair, it is strongly  
recommended to use the external lightning arrester for  
lightning protection of the equipment. See the next section for  
its installation. The external lightning arrester should be  
provided by users themselves.  
Note  
5.6. Installing External Lightning Arrester  
The external lightning arrester is installed between the signal channel and the protected equipment using a serial  
connection. The following figure shows its connection.  
Figure 5-7 Connection of the external lightning arrester  
Device  
Transfer cable  
2 U  
External cable  
External lightning arrester  
For specific installation procedure and precautions of the external lightning arrester, see the product instructions.  
The basic installation procedures are as follows:  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 5-4 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Step 1 Connecting the Grounding Cable. Connect the grounding cable of  
the external lightning arrester to the grounding screw stably and  
check that the length of the tieline is long enough.  
Step 2 Use a multimeter to check whether its grounding cable is well  
connected to the grounding screw and chassis  
Step 3 Based on the description of the product instructions, connect the  
lightning arrester with the equipment network interface through  
the tieline and with external cables at the same time. Then check  
whether the network interface LED is operates normally.  
Examine the interface identification of the external lightning  
arrester carefully, do not connect the external cable and  
Note  
tieline to the equipment inversely.  
Step 4 Fix the external lightning arrester and bind cables in an orderly  
fashion.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 5-5 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 5-6 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 6  
6. System Configuration and Management  
6.1. Equipment Power-on  
When the 3P@C 4450E is installed, you may power it on. The following phenomena will occur when the  
equipment is powered on:  
„
First the RUN indicator of the SMUB will be on, and the RUN indicator of the ADUB/ADUC or  
the VDUB will start to flash.  
„
After that, the 3P@C 4450E switch will conduct self-check and begin to load system software.  
At this time, the “LINK” indicator of a port that has been connected reliably will be solid on  
while the ACTIVE indicator will be off. About 90 seconds later, the switch enters the normal  
working state. For the connected port, if the ACTIVE indicator starts flashing, it indicates that  
this port is transmitting or receiving data.  
„
If the Console interface is now connected to a PC with a HyperTerminal, then such product  
information as company name, product serial number and hardware and software versions will  
be displayed on the PC screen, and operation prompt will be given when the self-check is  
completed. After you correctly log in the system, you may enter the command line  
management system to perform 3P@C 4450E configuration and management. For the  
specific configuration method, please refer to the 3P@C 4450E IP-DSLAM Software  
Configuration Manual. If the Console interface is not connected to the PC, please refer to the  
Console interface connection described in Chapter 4.  
6.2. Setting Up the Configuration Environment  
6.2.1.Local Configuration via the Console Interface  
When the 3P@C 4450E is powered on, the system will first complete the self test. If everything is normal, the  
3P@COS login interface will appear. The specific procedure is shown as follows:  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Connect the Console interface on the SMUB to a certain terminal  
according to the method described in Chapter 4, and conduct the  
corresponding setting.  
When the 3P@C 4450E is powered on, such information as company  
name, production date and product version and some self test  
information of the system are displayed on the terminal screen first, as  
shown in the following:  
3P@C 4450EV2 Boot Loader Version 2.03  
Compiled: May 23 2003 14:46:07  
SDRAM test....passed.  
Base ethernet MAC address: 00:05:3b:00:04:99  
Uncompress start...  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 6-1 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Uncompress success, enter device initialize, Please wait...  
Entering 3P@COS ......Done.  
Initializing environment ...... Done.  
Loading startup config ...... Done.  
########################################################  
###  
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
Welcome to 3P@COS.  
Press Return to connect and config this system.  
#
########################################################  
####  
3P@COS V2.0Release7.4.0 on 3P@C 4450EV2.0.  
Login:  
Step 3  
Step 4  
When pressing <Enter> on the terminal, the system prompts you to  
input the login user name and password.  
The default user name for the login at the first time is “admin” and the  
password is “3P@C”. The user logging in with this user name and  
password has the administrator rights. The display is shown as  
follows:  
Login: admin  
Password: *******  
You will first enter the read-only mode of the system after successfully  
logging into the system. The command prompt is “3P@C>“. In this  
mode, you can only view the system configuration information, since  
common users can only enter the read-only mode. If you have the  
administrator rights and hope to configure the equipment, enter the  
configuration mode according to Step 4.  
Step 5  
Enter the configuration mode.  
Input the enable command in the read-only mode. Then the system  
requests you to input the password for entering the configuration  
mode. The default password is “3P@C”, as shown in the following:  
3P@C>enable  
Password: *******  
After you successfully enter the configuration mode, the command  
prompt becomes “3P@C(config)#”. In this mode, you can perform all  
the configuration operations on 3P@C 4450E. For the detailed  
description of the related configuration commands and methods,  
please refer to the 3P@C 4450E IP-DSLAM Configuration Manual.  
Save the configuration information.  
To make the equipment configuration still effective after the equipment  
is restarted, you need to use the save configuration command to save  
the configuration information. For example,  
Step 6  
Step 7  
3P@C(config)# save configuration  
Press Enter and wait for the system to save the configuration  
information.  
Exit the configuration mode.  
In the Configuration Mode, you may use the exit command to exit the  
Configuration Mode and go back to the read-only mode. You may also  
use the exit command in the read-only mode. However, it only  
functions to exit the 3P@COS, similar to the function of the logout and  
quit commands.  
To exit the 3P@COS, use the logout or quit command, or use the exit  
command in the read-only mode.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 6-2 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
6.2.2.Remote Configuration via Telnet  
3P@C 4450E supports the Telnet remote management. The 10/100M interface on the SMUB of 3P@C 4450E  
can be connected to the LAN, and you may log in to 3P@C 4450E by Telnet remotely through the computer in  
the LAN, thus implementing remote configuration management. The connection diagram is shown in Figure 6-1.  
Figure 6-1 Remote management of 3P@C 4450E via Telnet  
To implement remote management of Telnet, take the following steps:  
Step 1  
Enter the command line management system 3P@COS via  
the Console interface, and enter the Configuration Mode  
according to the method mentioned above.  
Step 2  
Set IP address for 3P@C 4450E.  
The 3P@C 4450E switch has a default VLAN named “default”.  
Set an IP address for the VLAN. This IP address will serve as  
the ID of the 3P@C 4450E in the network.  
3P@C(config)# config vlan default ipaddress 10.10.10.1/24  
Log in to the 3P@C 4450E by Telnet from the computer.  
telnet 10.10.10.1  
Step 3  
Then input the user name (“admin” by default) and password  
(“3P@C” by default) and you can log in successfully.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 6-3 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
6.3. Command Line System  
3P@C 4450E adopts the 3P@COS. 3P@COS is the operating system developed specially for its 3P@C series  
of products.  
All the commands of the 3P@COS command line are  
case insensitive.  
Note  
6.3.1.Command Mode  
There are two command modes for the 3P@C 4450E IP-DSLAM : Read-only mode for ordinary users and  
configuration mode for administrators. For descriptions of the two command modes, refer to Table 6-1.  
Table 6-1 Description of the read-only mode and the configuration mode  
Command  
mode  
Function  
Applicable  
users  
Command  
prompt  
Read-only  
mode  
View most of the system Ordinary  
information and user  
3P@C>  
configuration information of  
the switch  
Configuration View and configure all the Administrator 3P@C(config)#  
mode information of the switch  
The user that logs in the system with default user name “admin” and password “3P@C” is called an  
administrator who can configure and operate the switch in both read-only and configuration modes. After the  
administrator inputs the correct login username and password, he will first enter the read-only mode. To enter  
the configuration mode, he needs to use the enable command and input the password for entering the  
configuration mode. The administrator has both the rights to configure the switch and the rights to manage the  
users, including creating/deleting users, modifying user rights, modifying login password and the password for  
entering configuration mode.  
6.3.2.Common Commands  
For a preliminary understanding of the usage of the 3P@C 4450E commands, the following introduces the  
usage method of some common commands, as shown in Table 6-2 and Table 6-3.  
Table 6-2 Commands in the read-only mode  
Command  
clear  
Function  
Clears the screen display  
enable  
Enters the configuration mode to perform  
configuration and write operations on the switch  
Exits the current configuration mode and returns  
to the previous mode. If executed in the read-only  
mode, this command will enable users to exit  
from the system.  
exit  
help  
Shows how to use the syntax help in the  
command line  
list  
logout  
Shows the list of current available commands  
Logs out and disconnects  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 6-4 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Command  
Function  
quit  
Quits the command line and disconnects (this  
command has the same function as logout)  
Shows the history commands that have been  
input  
show history  
show services  
Shows the services provided by the current  
system  
show version [all |<0-15>]  
terminal length <value>  
Shows the version information of cards  
Sets the number of lines output per screen of the  
terminal  
who  
Shows the users connected to the switch  
currently  
who am i  
show idle-timeout  
show time  
Shows the information of the current user  
Shows the idle timeout time  
Shows the current time of the system  
All commands except enable in the read-only mode are also effective in the configuration mode, so they are  
omitted in Table 6-3.  
Table 6-3 Common commands in the configuration mode  
Command  
Function  
enable-password  
Modifies your own password to enter the  
configuration mode  
config time <1970-2069> Configures the system time  
<1-12>  
<1-31>  
<HH:MM:SS>  
erase {startup-config}*1  
hostname <hostname>  
idle-timeout <value>  
Erases the system start-up configuration saved in  
the switch  
Renames the switch, for example, the default  
name of this switch is 3P@C  
Sets the idle waiting time of 3P@C 4450E before  
the system automatically enters the state before  
login  
show running-config  
show startup-config  
save {configuration}*1  
Shows the running configuration of the system  
Shows the startup configuration of the system  
Writes and saves the running configuration in the  
switch  
6.3.3.Online Help of Command Line  
3P@C 4450E provides abundant online help information to help users input the commands.  
„
„
You can enter <help> in any command mode to get a brief description of the help system.  
There is built-in syntax help in the command line interface.If you are not sure of the syntax of a  
certain command, you may input the known former part of the command and key in “?”. Then  
the command line prompts you the meaning or function of the command. If you input a space  
and “?” after the command, the command line will prompt the possible commands after the  
part of command you input. Then you may continue to input the command as prompted till the  
following appears:  
<cr> Just Press Enter to Execute command!  
It shows that the complete command has been input. Press Enter to execute it.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 6-5 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
6.3.4.Command Line Edit Feature  
Table 6-4 lists the line editing commands that can be used in the command line.  
Table 6-4 Line edit commands in the command line  
Command  
Function  
Deletes a character to the left  
Back Space or Del or  
Ctrl+h  
Up arrow key, or Ctrl+p  
Left arrow key or Ctrl+b  
Right arrow key or Ctrl+f  
Down arrow key or Ctrl+n  
Invokes the previous history command  
Moves the cursor to the left by a character  
Moves the cursor to the right by a character  
Shows the next history command if the up arrow  
key has been used previously to invoke the  
previous history command  
Ctrl+a  
Ctrl+e  
Ctrl+d  
Ctrl+k  
Ctrl+t  
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line  
Moves the cursor to the end of the line  
Deletes the character where the cursor is  
Deletes all characters after the cursor  
Changes the character where the cursor is with  
that on the left of the cursor, and moves the  
cursor to the right by a character  
Ctrl+u  
Ctrl+w  
Deletes the whole line  
Deletes all characters on the left of the cursor  
Of the above commands, Del, up arrow key, down arrow  
key, left arrow key and right arrow key only support the  
mode of using Telnet to configure the switch, rather than  
serial interface configuration. However, the Ctrl+h, Ctrl+p,  
Ctrl+b, Ctrl+f and Ctrl+n commands all support the above  
two login modes.  
prompt  
prompt  
For details of the commands, see the 3P@C 4450E IP-  
DSLAM Software Configuration Manual.  
6.4. System Management  
6.4.1.Storage Media and File Type  
The 3P@COS, configuration file and other applications of 3P@C 4450E are saved in the Flash. See Table 6-5  
for the related file types.  
Table 6-5 Correspondence between file types and command line parameters of 3P@C  
4450E  
Parameter  
Description  
3P@COS  
config-file  
3P@COS operating system  
Configuration file  
adufpga|vdubfpga  
FPGA code of ADU and VDU  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 6-6 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Parameter  
Description  
Bootrom  
Code of Bootrom part 2. The Bootrom of 3P@C  
4450E comprises two parts. The second part can  
be downloaded. If you do not download this part,  
the system startup will not be affected. Therefore,  
it is suggested not to download this part if you are  
not clear about this structure of 3P@C 4450E  
Bootrom, lest disastrous results be caused.  
Globespan ADSL chipset code  
Gtiooct  
6.4.2.Program File Management  
The software upgrade or download of 3P@COS can be conducted in the Xmodem or FTP mode and saved in  
the Flash.  
For details, see the 3P@C 4450E IP-DSLAM Software  
Configuration Manual.  
prompt  
6.4.3.Configuration File Management  
To make it convenient for you to configure the xDSL port of 3P@C 4450E, we have created the port  
configuration files, which enable you to directly configure the ports of different types, for the purpose of easy-to-  
use, high efficiency and time-saving.  
For details, see the 3P@C 4450E IP-DSLAM Software  
Configuration Manual.  
prompt  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 6-7 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PART II  
Maintenance  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 7  
7. System Maintenance  
7.1. System Upgrade  
7.1.1. Storage Media and File Type  
The storage media include:  
„
DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory): The program of the system control board runs in  
the DRAM.  
„
Flash (Flash Memory): It saves the software of the system control board and configuration  
files.  
The system supports four types of files:  
„
System file: Includes the program files of all modules and the FPGA code of the ADU and  
VDU. The system file is a compressed file, and cannot implement system boot. For example,  
04110468_DS41SMU_xducode_V02R00B10D04_20040915.bin.  
„
Program file of system control board: Used for the system control board to boot the system. It  
is usually hos_smu_vxxrxxbxxdxx.bin, for example, hos_smu_v02r00b09d06.bin.  
Configuration file: It is a text file that records user configuration information.  
LOG file: System log file.  
„
„
For the V1.00 hardware, the VDU needs to upgrade (board  
operating system). The download method is the same as  
other methods.  
prompt  
7.1.2. Sequence of System Upgrade  
System upgrade includes system file upgrade and upgrade of the program of system control boards without  
special sequence requirements. However, the version of the system file must be consistent with that of the  
program of the system control board. Otherwise, it may cause some abnormal symptoms.  
7.1.3.Upgrading the System File  
You can upgrade the system file in two modes:  
„
Upgrade the system file through the BOOTROM during equipment power-on  
This mode is used under such circumstances: The equipment cannot be started normally because of a failure,  
so you cannot upgrade the system file through a command line; or software is loaded for the first time before the  
equipment is delivered (upgrade in the FTP/Xmodem mode).  
„
Upgrade the system file through a command line in compliance with the FTP/Xmodem  
protocol after the equipment is started  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
1.1.1.51  
Upgrade through BOOTROM  
During code start, you can download the system software to the hard disc or mobile storage equipment.  
During the power-on, the BOOTROM menu prompts you to upgrade the system software in two ways: Upgrade  
through network ports, and upgrade through the Console port. Normally, you are suggested to upgrade the  
system file through the network port. It is because the system software is large, while the download speed  
through the Console port is very low.  
1.1.1.51.1  
Upgrade the system software through the network port  
Step 1: Set the FTP server remotely  
In this mode, you need to establish an FTP server in the terminal storing the program file, connect the equipment  
to be upgraded with the FTP server through the specified port, and establish a user name and password in the  
FTP server.  
SAGEM sa does not provide the FTP software, so users need to  
prepare or purchase such software. The 3CDaemon software of  
3COM is recommended.  
prompt  
Step 2: Enter the main menu of the Bootrom  
During equipment start, press and hold <Space> to enter the main menu of the Bootrom as follows:  
3P@C 4450E Boot Loader V2.21  
Compiled: Jan 3 2004 13:21:04  
SDRAM test....passed.  
Base ethernet MAC address: 00:05:3b:48:47:fd  
?
h
g
dl  
r
- List all available commands  
- List all available commands  
- Boot an executable image  
- Enter download mode to load new image or config file  
- Reboot system  
Press 'h' or '?' To get helping information.  
3P@C:  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 7-2 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Table 7-1 Bootrom command  
Seria Item  
l No.  
Description  
1
2
3
?
h
g
List all available commands  
List all available commands  
Exit from the menu, and continue the system load  
process. That is, implement the system boot file in the  
current system.  
4
5
dl  
r
Enter the download mode to download the configuration  
file of system file  
Reboot the system  
Step 3: Enter the upgrade submenu  
After entering the Bootrom main menu, select the fourth option: dl to enter the sub-menu as follows:  
you enter download mode  
?
- List all available commands  
- List all available commands  
- Exchange load mode(default FTP)  
- Print boot parameters  
h
n
p
c
- Change boot parameters  
a
- Download system image to Flash  
- Download system image and boot  
- Download system base config information  
- Download ADU fpga code  
- Download VDU fpga code  
- Download ADU chip code  
- Download VDU chip code  
- Download file to Flash  
A
s
fa  
fv  
da  
dv  
load <filename>  
del <filename>  
- Delete a file in Flash  
rename <oldname> <newname> - Rename a file in Flash  
erase fileinfo  
show flash  
x
- Erase files in Flash, all files will be lost!  
- Show Flash file info  
- Quit  
Table 7-2 Upgrade submenu in the network port  
Serial  
No.  
1
Item  
Description  
?
h
n
List all available commands  
List all available commands  
2
3
Change the download mode, use Xmode or FTP (default)  
mode  
4
P
Print the current download configuration parameters  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 7-3 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Serial  
No.  
Item  
Description  
5
6
7
c
Change the current download configuration parameter  
(user name and password)  
a
A
Download the system image file (program file of system  
control board) to 3P@C 4450E  
Download the system image file (program file of system  
control board) to 3P@C 4450E, and reboot the system  
8
s
Download the configuration file  
Download the ADU FPGA code  
Download the VDU FPGA code  
Download the ADU chipset code  
Download the VDU chipset code  
Download the file to Flash  
9
fa  
fv  
da  
fa  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
remove  
<filename>  
remove  
<filename>  
rename  
Delete the files in Flash  
Rename the files in Flash  
<old_filename>  
<new_filename>  
erase fileinfo  
16  
17  
18  
Delete all files in Flash  
show flash  
x
Show the information of all files in Flash  
Exit from the current download mode  
Step 4: Change relevant parameters of the network port  
Select c, and press Enter to begin interactive setting.  
Table 7-3 Relevant parameters downloaded by the network port of system control board  
Item  
Default Description  
value  
boot device  
boot device name, which generally need  
not be modified  
processor number  
host name  
0
Need not be set  
Need not be set  
:
file name  
The name of the version file to be  
upgraded. It needs to be modified as the  
actual system file name.  
hos_smu_v02r00b09d06.bin  
The IP address assigned to the network  
port of the system control board. It must  
share the same network segment with  
the IP address of the host of the FTP  
server.  
inet on ethernet(e)  
inet  
:
on  
backplane(b)  
Need not be set  
host inet(h)  
The IP address of the host of the FTP  
server. It must share the same network  
segment with the IP address assigned to  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 7-4 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Item  
Default Description  
value  
the network port of the system control  
board.  
gateway inet(g)  
:
Need not be set  
user(u)  
The user name assigned to the FTP  
server  
ftp password (pw)  
The assigned password corresponding  
to the user name  
flags(f)  
:
0x0  
Need not be set  
target name(tn)  
startup script(s)  
other(o)  
:
:
Need not be set  
Need not be set  
Need not be set  
:
The black items must be set manually.  
prompt  
Step 5: Select the media of downloading the upgrade file  
After modifying all parameters, select different command according to the type of the downloaded file. For  
example, “a” indicates the program file of the system control board, and “da” indicates the ADU chipset code. For  
details, see the description of download menu above.  
Step 6: Return to the main menu  
After completing the download, select the 18th option: x, to return to the main menu.  
Step 7: Reboot  
Select r in the main menu to reboot the system.  
1.1.1.51.2Upgrade the system software through the Console port  
In this mode, the terminal needs to support the Xmode of sending files. Preferably, the baud rate can reach  
115,200 to improve the download speed.  
Step 1: Connect the cables  
Connect the Console port of the system control board with the serial ports of the terminal through the cables  
attached, as shown in the figure below.  
Figure 7-1 Connecting the console cables  
Connect the console port  
of the equipment  
Connect the serial  
port of the PC  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 7-5 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
You must configure the terminal correctly.  
prompt  
Step 2: Start the equipment and enter the main menu of the Bootrom  
Power on the equipment, and press <Space> repeatedly. If the “3P@C” prompt appears, it indicates  
that you have accessed the Bootrom menu. The information of the menu is shown as follows:  
3P@C 4450E Boot Loader V2.21  
Compiled: Jan 3 2004 13:21:04  
SDRAM test....passed.  
Base ethernet MAC address: 00:05:3b:48:47:fd  
?
h
g
dl  
r
- List all available commands  
- List all available commands  
- Boot an executable image  
- Enter download mode to load new image or config file  
- Reboot system  
Press 'h' or '?' To get helping information.  
3P@C:  
For menu options and their meanings, see Figure 7-1.  
You can upgrade the 3P@COS software in the Xmodem  
mode. Alternatively, you can download new host program in  
the FTP mode and save the program to Flash.  
prompt  
Step 3: Enter the download submenu  
Select the No. dl option to enter the download mode as follows:  
you enter download mode  
?
h
n
p
c
- List all available commands  
- List all available commands  
- Exchange load mode(default FTP)  
- Print boot parameters  
- Change boot parameters  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 7-6 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
a
- Download system image to Flash  
- Download system image and boot  
- Download system base config information  
- Download ADU fpga code  
- Download VDU fpga code  
- Download ADU chip code  
- Download VDU chip code  
- Download file to Flash  
A
s
fa  
fv  
da  
dv  
load <filename>  
del <filename>  
- Delete a file in Flash  
rename <oldname> <newname> - Rename a file in Flash  
erase fileinfo  
show flash  
x
- Erase files in Flash, all files will be lost!  
- Show Flash file info  
- Quit  
For the description of menu options, see Figure 7-2.  
Step 4: Modify the download mode as Xmodem  
Enter a command n, you can select either Xmodem or FTP mode. Here, select Xmodem.  
Step 5: Enable the corresponding function option to download the software  
Enter a command a, and the system prompts:  
Downloading, please wait...  
Please set console baud rate 115200  
When you user the 3P@C 4450EV2.00 hardware, the system  
will prompt you to modify the baud rate as 115,200. In the case  
of the 3P@C 4450EV2.00 hardware, the baud rate needs to be  
prompt  
set to 9,600 when you connect 3P@C 4450E through the serial  
port. Then, you need to disconnect 3P@C 4450E first, modify  
the baud rate, and connect 3P@C 4450E again.  
The system is waiting for the terminal to send files through the Xmodem protocol. Click [Send/Send files] to  
initiate the function of sending files, and select the [Xmodem] protocol. Click <Browse> to choose the path of the  
main file, and click <Confirm>. The terminal begins to send files, as shown in the figure below:  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 7-7 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 7-2 hoosing the file to be sent  
Figure 7-3 File transfer interface  
Step 6: Return to the main menu  
After the file is transferred successfully, the above interface disappears. The system returns to the serial port  
menu (set the rate to 9,600 bps). Execute the command x to return to the Bootrom main menu.  
1.1.1.52  
Upload/download the system file through FTP  
3P@C 4450E can upload and download the system software through FTP.  
The upload/download operation is implemented for the client. The download operation is to obtain the file of the  
server side. The upload operation is to transfer the file of the client to the server side.  
3P@C 4450E can sever as the server side or the client of the FTP.  
„
„
If 3P@C 4450E serves as the server, you can transfer the system file to the equipment  
through the command upload ftp [config-file] <A.B.C.D> <username> <password>  
<filename> in the client PC (containing the system file).  
If 3P@C 4450E serves as the client, you can download the system file in the remote server  
PC to the local equipment through the command download ftp [3P@COS|config-  
file|xducode|vduos] <A.B.C.D> <username> <password> <filename> in the 3P@C 4450E  
equipment.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 7-8 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
In the following procedures, 3P@C 4450E serves as the FTP client, and the remote PC (containing the system  
file) serves as the FTP server.  
Suppose that the IP address of the PC server is 10.1.1.2/24 and that the FTP Server service is  
enabled. Implement the following procedures in 3P@C 4450E.  
Step 1: Connect the equipment to the PC through a network  
Figure 7-4 Connection mode  
PC server:  
Connect the console port  
of the equipment  
Terminal  
Step 2: Configure the IP address of the equipment interface, and ensure that you can PING through the server  
Step 1  
Step 1: The user with the administrator right logs in and enters the  
configuration mode through the serial port or telnet.  
3P@C> en  
Password:  
3P@C(config)#  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Configure 3P@C 4450E and the host where the downloaded file is located  
well so that they can communicate with each other normally. Enable the  
FTP Server in the host, and configure the login user name, password and  
path of downloading the file.  
3P@C(config)#  
Check whether the interworking with the FTP Server.  
3P@C(config)#Ping 10.1.1.2  
Step 3: Log in to 3P@C 4450E, and download the required file  
Step 1 Log in to 3P@C 4450E, input the user name and password to download the  
required file.  
3P@C(config)#  
download  
ftp  
[3P@COS|config-file|xducode|vduos]  
<A.B.C.D> <username> <password> <filename>  
Step 4: Reboot 3P@C 4450E  
After the download, input the reboot command to reboot the switch.  
Step 1  
3P@C(config)# reboot  
The following information indicates the download through FTP is successful:  
Trying download file from ftp server, please wait...  
Successfully finished receiving file.  
Trying write file to flash......  
Finished.  
You've successfully download new image file  
Now you can type reboot command to reboot system.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 7-9 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
7.1.4. Upgrading the Master System Control Board  
You can upgrade the program file of the system control board in the ways below:  
„
Upgrade the system file through the BOOTROM during equipment power-on  
This upgrade way is used under this circumstance: The equipment cannot be started normally, so you cannot  
upgrade the program file through the command line (separate software of the system control board is required,  
the name is usually rpu.bin).  
„
Upgrade the program file through the command line in compliance with the FTP/Xmodem  
protocol after the equipment is started.  
1.1.1.53  
Upgrade the program file through BOOTROM  
Note that the upgrade is to download the files to be upgraded in a certain way into a storing medium of the  
equipment and start the equipment through the file.  
During the power-on, the BOOTROM menu prompts you to upgrade the master system control board in two  
ways: Upgrade through network ports, and upgrade through the Console port. Normally, you are suggested to  
upgrade the system file through the network port. It is because the system software is large, while the download  
speed through the Console port is very low.  
1.1.1.53.1  
Upgrade the master system control board software through the network port  
Step 1: Set the FTP server remotely  
Step 2: Start the equipment and enter the main menu of the Bootrom  
Step 3: Enter the upgrade submenu of the network port  
Step 4: Modify download-related parameters of the network port  
For operation details, see section 7.1.3.  
prompt  
Step 5: Select the download file  
After modifying all parameters, select the type of the download file. Here, select a or A to upgrade the system  
control board.  
Step 6: Return to the main menu  
After the download, select x to return to the main menu.  
Step 7: Select r in the main menu to reboot the system  
1.1.1.53.2  
Upgrade the master system control board software through the serial port  
In this mode, the terminal needs to support the Xmode of sending files. Preferably, the baud rate can reach  
115,200 to improve the download speed.  
Step 3: Connection the cable.  
Step 2: Start the equipment and enter the Bootrom main menu  
Step 4: Select the Xmodem download mode  
Step 5: Enable the corresponding function option to download the software  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 7-10  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
For operation details, see section 7.1.3.  
prompt  
Step 6: Return to the main menu  
After the file is transferred successfully, the above interface disappears. The system returns to the serial port  
menu. Execute the command x to return to the Bootrom main menu.  
Step 6: Reboot the system  
Execute the command r in the main menu to reboot the system.  
1.1.1.54  
Upgrade through FTP/Xmodem  
After starting the equipment, you can upgrade the system control board through FTP or Xmodem. If the user has  
separate system control board software, you can upgrade the master system control board separately. The  
operation is similar to that of upgrading the system file as described in section 7.1.3, except that their file names  
are different from each other. If the user upgrades the software of the master system control board through the  
system file, follow the procedures below:  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Download the system software  
For the downloading method, see section 7.1.3 “Upgrading the System  
File”.  
When you upgrade the version of the system control board, the system file  
is hos_smu_v02r00b09d06.bin, the address of the FTP server is 20.1.1.11,  
the user name is hostfile, and the password is drv.  
3P@C(config)# download ftp 3P@COS 20.1.1.11 hostfile drv  
hos_smu_v02r00b09d06.bin  
Trying to download file from ftp server, please wait...  
3048756 bytes received.  
Start saving 3P@COS image...  
Done.  
3P@C(config)# reboot  
Start check image and config file, please wait...  
--------------------------------------  
Current version is V2.0 Release10.4.0.  
System version will be V2.0 Release10.4.0 after reboot.  
Config file latest saved on TUE JAN 02 06:31:25 CST 2001 .  
--------------------------------------  
Are you sure to reboot the whole system? [Y/N]  
After starting the equipment, check whether the upgrade is successful or  
not.  
Step 3  
############################################################  
#
#
#
#
#
#
Welcome to 3P@COS.  
#
#
Press Return to connect and config this system.  
#
#
############################################################  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 7-11  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
login: admin  
Password:  
3P@C> enable  
Password:  
3P@C(config)# show version 0  
--------- Board In Slot 0 Version Information ---------  
Vlan Type  
Hardware  
Software  
(Compiled  
: SMUB  
Version : Version 2.30  
Version : V2.0 Release10.4.0  
Time) : Sep 20 2004 17:06:09  
CPLD U14 Version : Verison 9.0  
CPLD UD3 Version : Verison 2.0  
Manufacture  
Date : 2004-02-21  
Serial Number : 02030059D230042000047  
Base Mac Address : 00053b4847fd  
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
7.1.5.Upgrading the Standby System Control Board  
The standby system control board is upgraded automatically. After the program of the system control board is  
upgraded in the FTP/Xmodem mode, the system will automatically upgrade the software of the standby system  
control board if detecting the standby system control board.  
In the BOOTROM mode, you need to upgrade the system control board in the FTP/Xmodem mode again after  
the system control board is upgraded and the system is rebooted. Then the system automatically upgrades the  
standby system control board.  
7.2. Managing the Configuration File  
7.2.1.Type and Format of Configuration File  
The configuration file is in the text format. It records the configuration information of the equipment, and is used  
to guide the start or running of the equipment. The configuration file falls into two types:  
„
„
startup-config: After powered on, the equipment reads the configuration file from the Flash  
memory to initialize the equipment. Therefore the configuration file in the Flash memory is  
called startup-config. If there is no configuration file in the Flash memory, the equipment will  
use the default parameters to initialize itself.  
show running-config: During equipment running, the configuration will be effectively instantly.  
After being saved, the show running-config will become startup-config upon next equipment  
reboot.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 7-12  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Format of configuration file  
„
„
„
Saved in the command form  
Only non-default constants are saved so as to save space.  
The configuration file is based on the command mode. The commands with the same  
command mode are listed together. Different command modes are separated by blank lines or  
remark lines (the lines starting with a “!”).  
„
End with “end of config”  
To view the content of the configuration file, execute the following commands in the configuration mode:  
Configuration procedure:  
Step 1  
Step 2  
show startup-config  
show running-config  
View the initial configuration of the  
equipment  
View the current configuration of the  
equipment  
The following is a configuration file:  
Configuration example:  
3P@C (config)# show running-config  
!3P@COS system config file  
idle-timeout 0  
!preconfig config  
!Syslog config  
config syslog lowest-level 7  
config syslog type NAS enable  
config syslog type RADIUS enable  
config syslog type DHCPS enable  
config syslog type HIPMG enable  
config syslog type PPPOE enable  
config syslog type PPP enable  
config syslog type L3SWITCH enable  
config syslog type SNTP enable  
Note that the command starting with “!” is remark information.  
7.2.2.Backuping the Configuration File  
After the user configures the equipment, the user is suggested to backup the configuration file. Then, the user  
can download the configuration file to the equipment, or load the configuration file to the equipment with similar  
configuration in case of need.  
The example below instructs you how to transfer the system file. The IP address of the FTP server is  
20.1.1.1, and the configuration file is renamed as config.txt after the configuration file is transferred to  
the FTP server.  
3P@C 4450E operation procedures:  
Step 1  
Step 2  
First enable the FTP server and set the user name and password. For  
example, the user name is “ftpuser” and the password is “123”.  
Transfer the system configuration file, and execute the commands below in  
the 3P@C 4450E equipment:  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 7-13  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
3P@C(config)# upload ftp config-file 20.1.1.11 ftpuser 123 config.txt  
Trying to upload file to ftp server, please wait...  
Successfully finished uploading file.  
Finished.  
You've successfully uploaded config-file config.txt  
3P@C(config)#  
7.2.3.Loading the Configuration File  
If the user’s several devices with the same configuration need to be configured, you can edit the configuration  
file of any of the devices offline in the prescribed format, and transfer the configuration file to the device through  
the FTP server. To validate the new configuration file, you must reboot the device.  
Configuration procedure:  
Step 1  
First enable the FTP server and set the user name and password. For  
example, the user name is “ftpuser”, the password is “123”, and the  
configuration file is named “config.txt”.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Download the configuration file in 3P@C 4450E.  
3P@C(config)#download ftp config-file 20.1.1.1 ftpuser 123 config.txt  
Reset the system  
3P@C(config)# reboot  
7.2.4.Erasing the Configuration File  
You can clear the configuration file by executing the command erase. After the configuration file is erased, the  
equipment will use default configuration parameters for initialization upon next power-on. You need to erase the  
configuration file under one of the circumstances below:  
System upgrade  
„
„
The configuration file is damaged.  
A mistaken configuration file is loaded.  
Configuration procedure:  
Step 1  
erase  
Erase the configuration file from  
the storage media  
7.3. Querying the Maintenance Information  
7.3.1. Querying the Current Software Version  
Operation Guide  
Execute the command show version [all|<0-15>] to show the version information of all/some cards in 3P@C  
4450E.  
Reference index  
The version information of the system software must be correct. The software versions (3P@COS(tm) Version)  
of all cards must be consistent with one another. The HardwareVersion and SerialNo. must be consistent with  
those of the cards.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 7-14  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
For example:  
3P@C(config)# show version 6  
--------- Board In Slot 6 Version Information ---------  
Board  
Type : ADU_GS_32  
Version : V0.2:  
Version : A1.3  
Hardware  
FPGA  
CPLD  
Version : 1.0  
ADU Serial Number : API-71  
ADU Firmware Version : X3727  
ADU Vendor  
ID : GSPN  
--------------------------------------------------------  
7.3.2.Viewing the Current Configuration  
Operation Guide  
Execute the command show running-config to show the running configuration of the equipment.  
Reference index  
The result contains the configuration commands and parameters of all modules.  
7.3.3.Querying the Port Status  
Operation Guide  
Execute the command show port [<portlist>|all|active] to query the status information of all ports or specified  
ports, including the up/down state, port rate, duplex, flow control and self-negotiation mode.  
Reference index  
The Up/Down state is consistent with the indication in the panel indicator. The rate, duplex, flow control and self-  
negotiation mode of the port are all correct.  
For example: View the status of Port 7:7.  
3P@C(config)# show port 7:7  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Port:<7:7> 's Current Value Information  
Link state  
: Up  
Port state  
: enabled  
Port Default VLAN ID  
: 2374 Port VLAN name  
: dsl2374  
Remote modem connection : YES  
Service Mode : G.dmt Channel Mode  
: Interleaved  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 7-15  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
DS Rate(Kbps)  
: 7584  
: 12.00 US NoiseMargin(dB)  
US Interleaved Delay(ms) : 8  
US Rate(Kbps)  
: 1024  
DS NoiseMargin(dB)  
: 8.00  
DS Interleaved Delay(ms) : 16  
DS Attenuation(dB)  
DS Out Power(dB)  
: 1.50  
: 7.70  
US Attenuation(dB)  
US Out power(dB)  
: 0.00  
: 12.40  
DS Attainable Rate(Kbps) : 10544 US Attainable Rate(Kbps) : 1157  
The parameters are described as follows:  
„
„
Link state: Whether the port is in linked (up or down).  
Port state: Whether the port is enabled or not. If the port is in the Disable state, the Link state  
must be down.  
„
Port Default VLAN ID: By default, each port belongs to the VLAN created by a system to  
isolate the ports. This item indicates the ID of the VLAN where the port is located.  
Port VLAN name: Name of the VLAN where the port is located  
Remote modem connection: Whether the port is connected with a PC through a modem  
Service Mode: Port working mode  
Channel Mode: Channel mode  
DS Rate(Kbps): Downstream rate (Kbps)  
US Rate(Kbps): Upstream rate (Kbps)  
DS NoiseMargin(dB):  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
US NoiseMargin(dB): Upstream noise margin  
DS Interleaved Delay(ms): Downstream interleaved delay (ms)  
US Interleaved Delay(ms): Upstream interleaved delay (ms)  
DS Attenuation(dB): Downstream attenuation (dB)  
US Attenuation(dB): Upstream attenuation (dB)  
DS Out Power(dB): Downstream output power (dB)  
US Out power(dB): Upstream output power (dB)  
DS Attainable Rate(Kbps): Downstream attainable rate (Kbps)  
US Attainable Rate(Kbps): Upstream attainable rate (Kbps)  
7.3.4. Querying the VLAN Status  
Operation Guide  
Execute the command show vlan {<name>}*1 to the status of a specified VLAN or all VLANs, including  
Up/Down state, and the relationship of the port members in the VLAN (Tagged/Untagged).  
Reference index  
The Up/Down state of the VLAN is normal, and the relationship of the port members in the VLAN  
(Tagged/Untagged) is consistent with that in the configuration.  
For example, query the VLAN default configuration information:  
3P@C(config)# show vlan default  
VLAN ID: 2047  
Vlan Name : Default  
Vlan Type  
: Normal  
Mac address : 00:05:3b:48:08:a6  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 7-16  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Tagged Ports :  
Untagged Ports : 0:1 0:2 0:4  
7.3.5.Viewing FIB Table  
Operation Guide  
Execute the command show fdb {[mac] <macaddr>}*1 {[vlan] [<name>|<1-4095>]}*1  
{[agingtime]}*1 {[permanent]}*1 {[port][ <portlist>]}*1 {[slot][<0-15>]}*1to view the  
FDB table. The table contains the information including: User MAC address, whether the MAC address of the  
opposite router is learned or not, whether the port and Vlan Name are correct or not, and fdb aging time.  
Reference index  
The information of the FDB address table is showed as follows:  
3P@C(config)# show fdb  
----- Begin of Mac Address Table Information (all)-----  
Total 1 mac address entry showed.  
Mac address  
Port Vlan name  
Flags  
------------------------------------------------------  
00:04:93:40:47:06 <3:23> default  
Age  
------------------ ---- -----------------------------  
-------- End of Mac Address Table Information -------  
The FDB entries to the CPU are not displayed.  
prompt  
7.3.6.Viewing the ARP Table  
Operation Guide  
You can execute the command show arp {[<A.B.C.D>|permanent]}*1 to see whether the ARP has learned the  
MAC address of the corresponding IP.  
Reference index  
For example:  
3P@C(config)# show arp  
Begin to show arp table information  
Physics Address Ip Address  
Type  
Total 1 information (include dynamic and permanent)  
00:01:02:28:49:06 20.1.1.2  
Total 1 information showed  
End to show arp table information  
dynamic  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 7-17  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
7.3.7.Viewing the Route Information  
Operation Guide  
You can execute the command show ip route to query route information: Whether the route table is correct,  
whether the configured static route and OSPF/RIP route have been learned or not, and whether the route is  
selected correctly or not.  
Reference index  
For example:  
3P@C(config)# show ip route  
Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, O - OSPF  
> - selected route, * - selected nexthop  
S>* 0.0.0.0/0 [1/0] via 10.16.0.254, 3P@C  
C>* 2.2.2.0/24 is directly connected, pppoe1  
C>* 10.0.0.0/16 is directly connected, uplink  
C>* 10.10.1.0/24 is directly connected, server2  
S 10.10.1.0/24 [1/0] via 10.11.1.254 inactive  
C>* 10.16.0.0/16 is directly connected, 3P@C  
C>* 12.1.0.0/16 is directly connected, server  
C>* 192.168.0.0/16 is directly connected, adsl  
S>* 192.168.2.0/24 [1/0] via 192.168.1.3, adsl  
7.3.8. Querying the System Running Time  
Operation Guide  
You can execute the command show running-time to query the system running time.  
Reference index  
The Current system time is consistent with Beijing time. The Running_time is correct.  
For example:  
3P@C(config)# show running-time  
Running time is:0 days 1 hours 51 minutes 45 seconds  
7.4. Handling Password Loss  
Before equipment delivery, the default login user name is “admin”, the default password is “3P@C”, and the  
default password for entering the configuration mode is also “3P@C”. If the user modifies the above password,  
the user must bear the new password in mind. If forgetting the new password, the user can follow the  
procedures below:  
Step 1: Power on the equipment, and press and hold <Space> to enter the BootROM menu. Select “g” (Boot an  
executable image) to skip over password check.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 7-18  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Step 2: Use the default user name “admin” and default password “3P@C” to log in.  
To use the original configuration continuously, the user can go  
on to Step 3. To configure the user name and password again,  
ignore the following steps.  
prompt  
Step 3: Transfer the startup-config configuration file to the terminal equipment in the FTP/Xmodem mode.  
Step 4: Modify the uploaded file. Replace the user management part of the uploaded configuration file with the  
following data:  
user add admin login-password b58317da28dc92ba6c5509c317c633b8  
user role admin ADMIN enable-password b58317da28dc92ba6c5509c317c633b8  
Step 5: Download the modified configuration file to the Flash of the equipment  
Step 6: Reboot the equipment.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 7-19  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 7-20  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 8  
8. Port Maintenance  
8.1. Checking the Optical Interface  
Before connecting the optical interfaces at the transmitting end and at the receiving end through optical fibers,  
you need to check and test the optical interface to avoid data transmission error and component damage.  
1. Check whether the types of the optical interfaces at the transmitting and receiving ends match each other  
The type of the optical interface at the transmitting end must match that at the receiving end in the respects:  
Wavelength, optical fiber mode, transmission rate, and maximum transmission distance.  
2. Check whether the type of the optical interface matches the type of the connected optical fiber  
The type of the optical interface must match the type of the connected optical fiber in the respects: Wavelength,  
optical fiber mode, and connector.  
3. Check the optical interface for short-distance optical fiber transmission  
For short-distance optical fiber transmission, you can use the self-loop method to check the optical  
interface status. Connect the transmitting end with the receiving end of the optical interface through an  
well-matched optical jumper. If the LINK indicator is on, it indicates that the transceiving function of the  
optical interface is normal.  
4. Check the optical interface for long-distance optical fiber transmission  
When using the optical module supporting the long-distance transmission of more than 10 km, you need to  
measure the optical power at the receiving end with an optical power meter, and ensure that the measured value  
ranges between the overload point and receiving sensitivity.  
„
If the optical signal power at the receiving end exceeds the overload point at the receiving  
end, the optical interface at the receiving end will be damaged. Therefore, you need to use an  
optical attenuator (active) or flange (passive) in the line to reduce the optical signal power at  
the receiving end. You can adjust the attenuation value of the optical attenuator or flange, so  
that the optical signal power at the receiving end is within a reasonable range.  
„
If the optical signal power at the opposite end is less than the receiving sensitivity of the  
optical interface at the receiving end, it will cause data loss. If this problem occurs, you need to  
check whether the fiber connector contacts well or the optical interface is dirtied or damaged.  
If the problem still occurs, it may be caused by poor fiber link transmission and extreme  
transmission distance. Then, you need to consider using an optical amplifier or optical module  
supporting longer distance transmission.  
The table below describes the attributes of different types of optical modules, and the range of receiving optical  
power.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Table 1-3 Parameter table on the modules of SFP optical interface  
Type  
Rate  
Optical Maximum  
Optical  
Transmitt Transmit Receivi Receivi  
(bps)  
fiber  
transmissio connect ing  
ting  
ng  
ng  
mode  
n distance  
or type  
center  
waveleng power  
optical  
overlo  
ad  
sensitivi  
ty  
th (nm)  
1,310  
1,310  
1,550  
1,310  
1310  
(dBm)  
-15 ~ 0  
-5 ~ 0  
-5~0  
point  
(dBm)  
-8  
((dBm)  
SFP-SM-155M-15K  
SFP-SM-155M-40K  
SFP-SM-155M-80K  
SFP-SM-622M-15K  
SFP-SM-622M-40K  
SFP-SM-622M-80K  
SFP-SM-1.25G-10K  
SFP-SM-1.25G-30K  
SFP-SM-1.25G-40K  
SFP-SM-1.25G-70K  
SFP-SM-1.25G-110K  
SFP-SM-2.5G-15K  
SFP-SM-2.5G-40K  
SFP-SM-2.5G-70K  
155 M Single  
mode  
155 M Single  
mode  
155 M Single  
mode  
622 M Single  
mode  
622 M Single  
mode  
622 M Single  
mode  
15  
40  
80  
15  
40  
80  
10  
30  
40  
70  
110  
15  
40  
70  
LC  
LC  
LC  
LC  
LC  
LC  
LC  
LC  
LC  
LC  
LC  
LC  
LC  
LC  
-28  
-34  
-34  
-28  
-28  
-28  
-23  
-20  
-21  
-22  
-30  
-18  
-19  
-19  
-10  
-10  
-8  
-8  
-8  
-3  
-3  
-3  
-3  
-9  
-9  
-9  
-9  
-15 ~ 0  
-5~ 2  
1,550  
1,310  
1,310  
1,310  
1,550  
1,550  
1,310  
1,310  
1,550  
-5 ~ 2  
-5~0  
1.25  
G
1.25  
G
1.25  
G
1.25  
G
Single  
mode  
Single  
mode  
Single  
mode  
Single  
mode  
Single  
mode  
Single  
mode  
Single  
mode  
Single  
mode  
-4 ~ 2  
-5 ~ 2  
-2~5  
1.25  
G
2.5 G  
0 ~ 5  
-10 ~ 2  
-10 ~ 3  
-10 ~ 3  
2.5 G  
2.5 G  
Table 1-4 Parameter table on the modules of XENPAK optical interface  
Rate Optical Maximum Conne Transmittin Transmitti  
g center ng optical  
Type  
Receivi  
ng  
overloa sensitivi  
d point  
(dBm)  
0.5  
Receivi  
ng  
(bps) fiber  
mode  
transmis  
sion  
ctor  
Type  
wavelength power  
(nm)  
distance  
ty  
(dBm)  
-10.3  
Xenpak-SM-10G-10K  
10 G Single  
mode  
10  
SC  
1310  
-8.2~0.5  
8.2. Checking the Status of the User Port  
8.2.1.Querying the ADSL Port Status  
You can query the ADSL port information by executing the commands below:  
„
„
show port [portlist|all|active]: Show the current information of the port  
show port [portlist|all|active] adsl line-config: Show the configuration information of the  
ADSL port  
The first command is used to show the current information that is subject to update in real time. The second  
command is used to show configuration information that does not vary with the port link status.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 8-2 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
For the show port [portlist|all|active] command, if the port is in the up state, the system will show some current  
information on the ADSL link: Current working mode, current upstream/downstream rate, current noise margin,  
and upstream/downstream attainable rate. If the port in the down state, the displayed information will be of little  
use. For example (only one port 15:2 is in the up state):  
3P@C(config)#show port active  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Port:<15:2> 's Current Value Information  
Link state  
: Up  
Port state  
: enabled  
Port Default VLAN ID  
: 2881  
Port VLAN name  
: dsl2881  
Remote modem connection : YES  
Service Mode  
: G.dmt Channel Mode  
: 8064 US Rate(Kbps)  
: 12.00 US NoiseMargin(dB)  
: Interleaved  
: 1024  
DS Rate(Kbps)  
DS NoiseMargin(dB)  
: 7.00  
DS Interleaved Delay(ms) : 16  
US Interleaved Delay(ms) : 8  
DS Attenuation(dB)  
DS Out Power(dB)  
: 32.50 US Attenuation(dB)  
: 7.60 US Out power(dB)  
: 23.5  
: 12.40  
DS Attainable Rate(Kbps) : 10400 US Attainable Rate(Kbps) : 1186  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------  
The parameters in the command are described below:  
„
„
Link state: Whether the port is in the link state (up or down)  
Port state: Whether the port is enabled or not. If the port is in the Disable state, the Link state  
must be down.  
„
Port Default VLAN ID: By default, each port belongs to the VLAN created by a system to  
isolate the ports. This item indicates the ID of the VLAN where the port is located.  
Port VLAN name: Name of the VLAN where the port is located  
Remote modem connection: Whether the port is connected with a modem. If it is “yes”, it  
indicates that the port is connected with a modem.  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Service Mode: The working mode of the port (g.dmt, g.lite, or t1.413)  
Channel Mode: The channel mode for port data transmission (Interleaved or Fast).  
DS Rate(Kbps): Actual rate in the downstream direction (Kbps)  
US Rate(Kbps): Actual rate in the upstream direction (Kbps)  
DS NoiseMargin(dB): Actual noise margin in the downstream direction, that is, signal-to-noise  
ratio. The greater it is, the better the link quality in the downstream direction is.  
US NoiseMargin(dB): Actual noise margin in the upstream direction, that is, signal-to-noise  
ratio. The greater it is, the better the link quality in the upstream direction is.  
DS Interleaved Delay(ms): Actual interleaved depth in the downstream direction. It is used for  
interleaved channels.  
US Interleaved Delay(ms): Actual interleaved depth in the upstream direction. It is used for  
interleaved channels.  
DS Attenuation(dB): Link attenuation in the downlink direction. It is a link parameter calculated  
from the ATU-R. The greater it is, the worse the link quality in the downstream direction.  
US Attenuation(dB): Link attenuation in the uplink direction. It is a link parameter calculated  
from the ATU-C. The greater it is, the worse the link quality in the upstream direction.  
„
„
„
„
„
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 8-3 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
„
„
DS Out Power(dB): Output power in the downstream direction. If the attenuation in the  
downstream direction is extremely large, the ATU-C will improve the output power in the  
downstream direction moderately to improve the signal-to-noise ratio, thus ensuring the link  
transmission quality in the downstream direction.  
US Out Power(dB): Output power in the upstream direction. If the attenuation in the upstream  
direction is extremely large, the ATU-R will improve the output power in the upstream direction  
moderately to improve the signal-to-noise ratio in the upstream direction, thus ensuring the link  
transmission quality in the upstream direction.  
„
„
DS Attainable Rate(Kbps): The estimated attainable link rate in THE downstream direction by  
the ATU-C according to the current link parameters.  
US Attainable Rate(Kbps): The estimated attainable link rate in upstream direction by the  
ATU-C according to the current link parameters.  
For the Show port [portlist|all|active] adsl line-config command, whether the port in the up or down state, the  
system will display port configuration information: Upstream/downstream rate, working mode, channel mode,  
interleaved depth, and upstream/downstream target noise margin. For example:  
3P@C(config)# show port 15:2 adsl line-config  
-----------------------------------------------------------------------  
Port:<15:2> 's Configuration Information  
Service Mode  
:MultiMode Channel Mode  
:Interleaved  
:32  
DS MinRate(Kbps)  
DS MaxRate(Kbps)  
:32  
US MinRate(Kbps)  
US MaxRate(Kbps)  
:8160  
:1024  
DS Interleaved Delay(ms) :32  
DS TargetNoiseMargin(dB) :6  
US Interleaved Delay(ms) :16  
US TargetNoiseMargin(dB) :6  
DS MaxNoiseMargin(dB)  
ATUC LossOfFrame  
:12  
:0  
US MinNoiseMargin(dB)  
ATUC LossOfSignal  
:0  
:0  
ATUC LossOfLink  
:0  
ATUC LossOfPower  
:0  
ATUC Errored  
:0  
-----------------------------------------------------------------------  
The parameters are described as follows:  
„
Service Mode: Working mode of the port. It can be multimode, g.dmt, g.lite, or t1.413. If it is  
configured as multimode, it indicates that the central office end and modem end can determine  
the actual working mode as g.dmt, g.lite, or t1.413 through negotiation.  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Channel Mode: Channel mode of the port. Its current value must be consistent with its  
configured value.  
DS MinRate(Kbps): The minimum rate in the downstream direction. It ranges within 1 – 8,160  
kbps. It must be less than the maximum rate in the downstream direction (32 kbps).  
US MinRate(Kbps): The minimum rate in the upstream direction. It ranges within 1 – 1,024  
kbps. It must be less than the maximum rate in the upstream direction.  
DS MinRate(Kbps): The maximum rate in the downstream direction. It ranges within 1 – 8,160  
kbps. It must be greater than the minimum rate in the downstream direction.  
US MinRate(Kbps): The maximum rate in the upstream direction. It ranges within 1 – 1,024  
kbps. It must be greater than the minimum rate in the upstream direction.  
DS Interleaved Delay(ms): The interleaved depth in the downstream direction. The actual  
interleaved depth in the downstream direction must be not greater than the configured value.  
US Interleaved Delay(ms): The interleaved depth in the upstream direction. The actual  
interleaved depth in the upstream direction must be not greater than the configured value.  
DS TargetNoiseMargin(dB): The target noise margin in the downstream direction. The actual  
noise margin in the downstream direction must be greater than this value.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 8-4 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
„
„
„
US TargetNoiseMargin(dB): The target noise margin in the upstream direction. The actual  
noise margin in the upstream direction must be greater than this value.  
DS MaxNoiseMargin(dB): The maximum noise margin in the downstream direction. The actual  
noise margin in the downstream direction must be less than this value.  
US MaxNoiseMargin(dB): The maximum noise margin in the upstream direction. The actual  
noise margin in the upstream direction must be less than this value.  
ATUC LossOfFrame: The frame loss threshold at the ATU-C side  
ATUC LossOfSignal: The signal loss threshold at the ATU-C side  
ATUC LossOfLink: The link loss threshold at the ATU-C side  
ATUC LossOfPower: The power loss threshold at the ATU-C side  
ATUC Errored: The errored second threshold at the ATU-C side  
„
„
„
„
„
8.2.2.Querying the VDSL Port Status  
You can query the VDSL port information by executing the commands below:  
„
„
show port [portlist|all|active]: Show the current information of the port  
show port [portlist|all|active] vdsl line-config: Show the configuration information of the VDSL  
port  
The first command is used to show the current information that is subject to update in real time. The second  
command is used to show configuration information that does not vary with the port link status.  
For the show port [portlist|all|active] command, if the port is in the up state, the system will show some current  
information on the VDSL port: Current upstream/downstream rate, whether the port self-negotiation is enabled,  
remote Ethernet speed (10 M/100 M), duplex mode (full/half), and whether flow control (flowctrol) is enabled.  
If the port is in the down state, the above parameters will not be available and not be displayed. For example:  
3P@C(config)# show port 14:19  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Port:<14:19> 's Current Value Information  
Link state  
: Up  
: 2834  
: 16.67 US line rate(Mbps)  
Port state  
: enabled  
: dsl2834  
: 12.5  
Port Default VLAN ID  
DS line rate(Mbps)  
Rt vdsl auto neg  
Port VLAN name  
: On  
: Half  
Rt ethernet speed  
Rt ethernet flowctrl  
: 100 M  
: On  
Rt ethernet duplex  
------------------------------------------------------------------------  
The parameters are described as follows:  
„
„
Link state: Whether the port is in the link state (up or down)  
Port state: Whether the port is enabled or not. If the port is in the Disable state, the Link state  
must be down.  
„
Port Default VLAN ID: By default, each port belongs to the VLAN created by a system to  
isolate the ports. This item indicates the ID of the VLAN where the port is located.  
Port VLAN name: Name of the VLAN where the port is located  
DS line rate(Mbps): Downstream line rate (Mbps). It can be 1.04, 1.56, 2.08, 4.17, 8.33, 10.04,  
12.5, or 16.67.  
„
„
„
US line rate(Mbps): Upstream line rate (Mbps). It can be 1.04, 1.56, 2.08, 4.17, 8.33, 10.04,  
12.5, or 16.67.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 8-5 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
„
Rt vdsl auto neg: Setting of remote vdsl self-negotiation. “on” indicates that the self-negotiation  
function is enabled, and “off” indicates that the self-negotiation function is disabled.  
Rt ethernet speed: Remote Ethernet speed (10 M/100 M)  
Rt ethernet duplex: Remote Ethernet duplex mode (full/half).  
Rt ethernet flowctrl: Remote Ethernet flow control. “on” indicates that the function is enabled,  
and “off” indicates that the function is disabled.  
„
„
„
For the show port [portlist|all|active] vdsl line-config command, whether the port is in the up or in the down  
state, the ystem will display the configuration information of the corresponding port: Upstream/downstream rate,  
self-negotiation setting, remote Ethernet speed (10 M/100 M), whether flowctrl is enabled, and duplex mode  
(full/half). For example:  
3P@C(config)# show port 14:19 vdsl line-config  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Port:<14:19> 's Config Information  
DS line rate(Mbps)  
Rt vdsl auto neg  
Rt ethernet duplex  
: 16.67 US line rate(Mbps)  
: 12.5  
: On  
: Full  
Rt ethernet speed  
Rt ethernet flowctrl  
: 100 M  
: On  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
The parameters are described as follows:  
„
„
„
DS line rate(Mbps): Downstream line rate (Mbps). It can be 1.04, 1.56, 2.08, 4.17, 8.33, 10.04,  
12.5, or 16.67.  
US line rate(Mbps): Upstream line rate (Mbps). It can be 1.04, 1.56, 2.08, 4.17, 8.33, 10.04,  
12.5, or 16.67.  
Rt vdsl auto neg: Setting of remote vdsl self-negotiation. “on” indicates that the self-negotiation  
function is enabled, and “off” indicates that the self-negotiation function is disabled.  
Rt ethernet speed: Remote Ethernet speed (10 M/100 M)  
„
„
Rt ethernet duplex: Remote Ethernet duplex mode (full/half).  
Rt ethernet flowctrl: Remote Ethernet flow control. “on” indicates that the function is enabled, and “off” indicates  
that the function is disabled.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 8-6 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 9  
9. Card Maintenance  
9.1. Maintenance for System Control Board  
9.1.1. Check  
1) Checking running status of the system control board through the indicator  
The corresponding status indicator in the front panel of the system control board is used to display the running  
status of the device, and it plays an important role in the fault analysis and location.  
The rough position or cause of the fault can be found through the indicator status, and the indicator status is  
helpful for the next processing procedure. The indicator does not have the sufficient information, so it is usually  
used with the coordination of the alarm information analysis.  
Check the system running status according to indicator description in the Table 9–1. When finding some  
exceptional cases, you should take some measures in time.  
The maintenance personnel should pay more attention to the  
study of the indicator meaning, and have the rapid response  
capability when some faults occur to the system.  
prompt  
Table 9-1 Description of LED status of the system control board SMUB  
Indicator  
System  
status  
Flag  
RUN  
Color  
Green  
Status  
Off  
Flashing  
Off  
Description  
The system does not run.  
The system runs normally.  
The system runs normally.  
indicator  
ALM  
Red  
ON  
The system has an alarm. When the  
device starts the self-inspection, this  
indicator will flash once, but it does not  
indicate an alarm.  
Status  
LINK Green  
Constantly When a stable link is built in the port, the  
indicator  
on  
corresponding indicator is constantly on.  
of  
the  
Off  
No link is in the port.  
Ethernet  
interface  
ACT  
Green  
Flashing  
Data is being received/transmitted in the  
port  
Off  
Data is not received/transmitted in the  
port  
Note: The flashing frequency of the system indicator in the  
master system control board is faster than that in the standby  
system control board. The system indicator of the master  
system control board flashes three times per second, and the  
system indicator of the standby system control board flashes  
once per second.  
prompt  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
2) Checking running status of the system control board through the command line  
Maintenance item  
Operation  
Inspection  
Check the system In the hidden mode  
Check whether the CPU utilization  
is very high (if the data is being  
saved or the Flash is being written,  
the high CPU utilization is normal,  
but this process does not last  
long). The normal CPU utilization  
of the service board is not higher  
than 20%.  
resource utilization  
(input the qpmz in the  
config mode to enter the  
hidden mode), enter the  
show cpuusage all  
command to check the  
CPU utilization.  
Use the command show  
cpuusage record to  
check the time when the  
CPU utilization reaches  
maximum value (in the  
hidden mode)  
Check the CPU utilization in the  
historical durations.  
Check the version of show version all  
the system control  
board  
If the version of the master system  
control board is not consistent with  
that of the standby system control  
board, the system running fault will  
happen.  
Show the running show running-time (in  
time from the last the hidden mode)  
reboot to now  
Check whether an accidental  
master/standby switchover occurs  
to the system control board from  
the last reboot to now.  
Check the system show time (in the config The time here should be the  
time:  
mode)  
standard Beijing time.  
9.1.2. Hot Plugging  
The device supports the hot plugging of the system control board in the normal running, and the configuration  
information of the original card is saved in the system in the plugging process.  
„
If the device is just configured with a system control board, the system will not run when you  
unplug the system control board.  
„
If the device is configured with two system control boards, the system will run normally when  
you unplug the standby system control board. If you unplug the master system control board,  
the master/standby switchover will occur to the device.  
After unplugging a card from a slot, you cannot plug a new card immediately, and you should do it in a minute.  
During the system startup process, the hot plugging is not  
supported.  
Note  
9.1.3. Master/Standby Switchover  
The master/standby switchover refers to that the master/standby relationship switchover happens when the  
system control board is operated manually or some faults occur to it in the redundancy mode.  
The master/standby switchover is a self-protection function of the system. When some faults occur to the master  
system control board, the master/standby is implemented automatically. In this way, the service is transferred to  
the standby system control board, and the system can continue to run.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 9-2 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
To locate the faults, sometimes the manual master/standby switchover is needed. Check whether the master  
system control board runs normally or the master/standby relationship is coordinative by inspecting the switched  
system status. The detailed procedures of the manual master/standby operation are described below.  
The master/standby switchover causes the interruption of the  
service, so you must backup the system data before  
implementing the manual master/standby switchover.  
Note  
Otherwise, you may lose the data.  
Procedures of the manual master/standby switchover  
Steps  
Operation  
Inspection (display of the  
indicator and screen)  
Step 1  
To check whether the standby The system indicator flashes once  
system control board runs normally, per second.  
execute the command: show  
boardinfo  
Step 2  
Backup the current configuration  
information of the master system  
control board to the standby system  
control board (with a service board,  
the configuration information can  
be saved to the standby board  
automatically):  
3P@C(config)#save  
configuration.  
Step 3  
To implement the master/standby  
switchover, execute the command:  
3P@C(config)#systemswitch.  
The master/standby switchover  
needs about 20 seconds, and the  
service is interrupted temporarily in  
the later 30 seconds. Finally, the  
standby system control board takes  
over the service of the master  
system control board.  
Step 4  
Step 5  
Connect the console cable to the  
Console interface of the current  
master system control board.  
To  
check  
whether  
the 1. The system indicator of the  
master/standby switchover ends, current master system control  
and whether the master/standby board becomes the continuous  
system control boards work in the flashing (three times per second).  
coordinative manner, execute the 2. The system indicator of the  
command show boardinfo in the  
standby system control board  
current master system control flashes once per second.  
board.  
Step 6  
To check whether the system runs 1. The response status of each  
normally, and whether all service ping packet: If the response packet  
boards are registered normally and is not received in the time out  
run stably after the switchover,  
use the Ping command to check  
status, “Request time out” is  
output. Otherwise, the number of  
the connectivity between the device the bytes of the data and the  
and users, for example:  
packet serial number,  
TTL, and response time of the  
response packets are displayed.  
The final statistics information  
includes the Min. values, Max.  
values and averages of the number  
of packets sent, number of  
ping 192.168.0.1.  
response  
packets  
received,  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 9-3 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Steps  
Operation  
Inspection (display of the  
indicator and screen)  
proportion of packets without  
response and the response time.  
Comparing with other methods, the manual master/standby switchover does not provide the exact location for  
the cause of the fault. Due to the randomicity of the running software, the fault phenomenon usually is not  
repeated in the short term after the switchover, and the nature of the fault is easily hidden, thus bringing the  
hidden trouble for security and running stability of the device. So this method is just used as the temporary  
emergency measure, and it is should be used carefully when there is no other alternatives.  
9.1.4. Reset  
Reset is to reboot the part of the devices or all devices manually.  
Reset of the system control board needs to be implemented under the following condition:  
„
„
After upgrading the software system, you need to reset the system control board to make the  
new system effective.  
When some unrecovered faults occur to the system, you can recover the system by resetting  
the system control board. Reset is used to judge whether the software runs confusedly,  
whether the program is suspended, and It is an extreme action taken when there is no other  
alternatives.  
Reset method for the card:  
Reset  
mode  
Soft reset  
Operation  
Generation conditions  
Upgrading  
Use the reboot command to  
reboot the integrated device.  
Use the reboot {<0-15>}*1  
command to reboot the card in  
the specified slot.  
Troubleshooting  
You should enter the save configuration command to save  
the configuration information before resetting the system  
control board. Otherwise, you may lose the information.  
Note  
Reset operation often causes interruption of the system service, even the system down, and brings the  
server negative influence to the daily operation of the system. So reset is just used in the occasion with  
a small influence and the backup measure. Usually reset is not recommended to locate the fault.  
9.1.5. Replacing System Control Board  
If the system control board needs to be replaced in the system running process, you should implement the  
following operation:  
1) Replacement method of the master system control board  
Steps  
Operation  
Inspection (display of the  
indicator and screen)  
Step 1  
To confirm the slot of the The system indicator flashes  
replaced master system control three times per second.  
board, execute the command  
show boardinfo.  
Step 2  
To  
implement  
the  
master/standby switchover, see  
the details in the “steps for the  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 9-4 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Steps  
Operation  
Inspection (display of the  
indicator and screen)  
master/standby switchover”.  
In the card plugging process, you must wear the anti-static  
wrist strap, and guarantee that the other end of the anti-static  
wrist strap is connected to the ESD jack of the chassis. On the  
other hand, you should avoid contacting the circuit with your  
hands.  
Note  
Step 3  
Unplug the master system  
control board:  
a) Unplug the cables from all  
interfaces of the card.  
b) Unscrew the screws from the  
both sides of the card.  
c) Pull the extractors on the  
both sides of the card, and  
press them outward, thus  
unplugging the card from the  
connector of the back-plane of  
the chassis.  
d) Hold the front panel to unplug  
the  
card  
from  
the  
slot  
completely.  
e) Put the replaced card in the  
anti-static package.  
Step 4  
After unplugging the card, you  
should plug  
a
new system  
control board in the void system  
control board slot in 60  
seconds. Now, this system  
control board is a standby one  
(see the detailed installation  
steps  
in  
the  
hardware  
installation part).  
Step 5  
To check whether the current The system indicator flashes  
standby system control board once per second.  
runs normally, execute the  
command: show boardinfo.  
2) Replacement method of the standby system control board  
The replacement process of the standby system control board is simple. After the hot plugging, the system  
recovers, and then the replacement ends.  
Steps  
Operation  
Inspection (display of the  
indicator and screen)  
Step 1  
To confirm the slot of the replaced The system indicator flashes once  
standby system control board, per second.  
execute the command show  
boardinfo.  
1. You should guarantee that the console cables are connected  
to the Console interface of the master system control board.  
In the card plugging process, you must wear the anti-static wrist  
strap, and guarantee that the other end of the anti-static wrist  
strap is connected to the ESD jack of the chassis. On the other  
hand, you should avoid contacting the circuit with your hands.  
Note  
Step 2  
Unplug the standby system  
control board:  
a) Unplug the cables from all  
interfaces of the card.  
b) Unscrew the screws from the  
both sides of the card.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 9-5 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Steps  
Operation  
Inspection (display of the  
indicator and screen)  
c) Pull the extractors on the both  
sides of the card, and press them  
outward, thus unplugging the card  
from the connector of the  
backboard of the chassis.  
d) Hold the front panel to unplug  
the card from the slot completely.  
e) Put the replaced card in the  
anti-static package.  
Step 3  
Step 4  
After unplugging the card, you  
should plug a new system control  
board in the void standby system  
control board slot in 60 seconds  
(see the detailed installation steps  
in the hardware installation part).  
To check whether the current The system indicator flashes once  
standby system control board runs per second.  
normally, execute the command:  
show boardinfo.  
9.2. Maintenance for Service Board  
9.2.1. Check  
The corresponding status indicator in the front panel of the service board is used to display the work status of the  
device or the card, and it plays an important role in the fault analysis and location.  
The rough position or cause of the fault can be found through the indicator status, and the indicator status is  
helpful for the next processing procedure. The indicator does not have the sufficient information, so it is usually  
used with the coordination of the alarm information analysis.  
Check the system running status according to indicator description in the following table. When finding some  
exceptional cases, you should take some measures in time.  
The maintenance personnel should pay more attention to the  
study of the indicator meaning, and have the rapid response  
capability when some faults occur to the system.  
prompt  
Table 9-2 Description of the indicator of the VDUB service board  
Indicator  
Status indicator RUN  
of the VDUB  
Flag  
Color Status  
Green On  
Off  
Description  
Power on the system.  
No power on or the system  
runs abnormally.  
Flashing  
Off  
ON  
The VDUB runs normally.  
The VDUB runs normally.  
The VDUB has an alarm.  
ALM  
Red  
Status indicator LINK  
of the interface  
of the VDSL  
user  
Green Constantly When a stable link is built in  
on  
the  
user  
interface,  
the  
corresponding indicator is  
constantly on.  
Off  
This user interface does not  
connect the users.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 9-6 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Indicator  
Flag  
Color Status  
Description  
ACT  
Green Flashing  
Data  
is  
being  
received/transmitted in the  
user interface.  
Off  
No  
data  
is  
received/transmitted in the  
user interface.  
Table 1-5 Description of the indicator of the ADUB service board  
Indicator  
Status indicator RUN  
of the ADUB  
Flag  
Color Status  
Green On  
Off  
Description  
Power on the system.  
No power on or the system runs  
abnormally.  
Flashing  
Off  
ON  
The ADUB runs normally.  
The ADUB runs normally.  
The ADUB has an alarm.  
ALM  
Red  
Table 1-6 Description of the indicator of the ADUC service board  
Indicator  
Status indicator RUN  
of the ADUC  
Flag  
Color Status  
Green On  
Off  
Description  
Power on the system.  
No power on or the system runs  
abnormally.  
Flashing  
Off  
ON  
The ADUC runs normally.  
The ADUC runs normally.  
The ADUC has an alarm.  
ALM  
Red  
9.2.2. Hot Plugging  
The device supports the hot plugging of the service board in the normal running, and the original configuration  
information is saved in the system in the plugging process. Two situations happen when the user replaces the  
service board:  
„
If the type of the subsequently plugged card is the same as that of the unplugged card, the  
original configuration information will be recovered automatically.  
„
If the type of the subsequently plugged card is different from that of the unplugged card, the  
original configuration information will not be recovered automatically, and the user needs to  
configure the new card.  
After unplugging the card from a slot, you cannot plug the card immediately, and you should do it in a minute.  
During the system startup process, the hot plugging is not  
supported.  
Note  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 9-7 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
9.2.3. Reset  
Reset of the service board needs to be implemented under the following condition:  
When some unrecovered faults occur to the system, you can recover the system by resetting the  
service board.  
Reset method for the card:  
Reset  
Operation  
Generation conditions  
mode  
Use the reboot {<0-15>}*1  
command to reboot the specified  
slot card.  
Soft reset  
Troubleshooting  
You can implement the power-off reboot to the service  
board through the hot plugging.  
prompt  
9.2.4. Replacing Service Board  
If the system control board needs to be replaced in the system running process, you should implement the  
following operation:  
Steps  
Operation  
Inspection (display of the  
indicator and screen)  
Step 1  
To confirm the slot of the replaced The system indicator flashes  
service board, execute the normally.  
command show version all or  
show boardinfo.  
Step 2  
Confirm that the service in the  
service board stops, and the  
service should be transferred to  
other cards or devices if  
necessary.  
In the card plugging process, you must wear the anti-static  
wrist strap, and guarantee that the other end of the anti-static  
wrist strap is connected to the ESD jack of the chassis. On the  
other hand, you should avoid contacting the circuit with your  
hands.  
Note  
Step 3  
Unplug the service board:  
a) Unplug the cables from all  
interfaces of the card.  
b) Unscrew the screws from the  
both sides of the card.  
c) Pull the extractors on the both  
sides of the card, and press them  
outward, thus unplugging the card  
from the connector of the  
backboard of the chassis.  
d) Hold the front panel to unplug  
the card from the slot completely.  
e) Put the replaced card in the  
anti-static package.  
Step 4  
After unplugging the card, you  
should plug a new service board  
in the slot of the original service  
board in 60 seconds  
(see the detailed installation steps  
in the hardware installation part).  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 9-8 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Steps  
Operation  
Inspection (display of the  
indicator and screen)  
Step 5  
To check the running status of the The system indicator flashes  
service board, execute the normally.  
command show version all or  
show boardinfo.  
If the type of the new card is the same as that of the original card, check whether the service on the interface of  
the new card is recovered. If the type of the new card is different from that of the original card, you should  
configure the service on the new card.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 9-9 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 10  
10. Power Distribution System  
Maintenance  
10.1.Checking Air-break Switch  
The air-break switch is in the DC power distribution panel, with the overcurrent protection and short circuit  
protection functions. In the normal running process, the air-break switch is ON. When a large current passes  
through the air-break switch, the air-break switch switches from ON to OFF to cut off the power supply, so the  
device is protected.  
Usually, you do not need to check the air-break switch. When the air-break switch switches to OFF suddenly, it  
indicates that there is something wrong with the power distribution system of the device or the device, and you  
should carefully look for the reasons that cause the short circuit protection before switching the air-break switch  
to ON.  
To find the reasons, you should cut off the power supply of the device firstly, switch the air-break switch to ON,  
and use the multimeter to measure the input resistance. If the value of the resistance approximates to zero Ω, it  
indicates that there is the short circuit in the interior, and you need to locate each module. When plugging each  
module, you can find the short circuit module by judging the change of the resistance before and after the  
plugging, and you can switch the air-break switch to ON after the troubleshooting.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 2 Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 11  
11. Line Provisioning & Maintenance  
11.1.Maintenance for Air Filter  
The air filter consists of chassis air filter and power supply air filter. The air filter is used to prevent the dust from  
entering the chassis and power supply, so the device is protected.  
11.1.1.Checking Air Filter  
The power supply air filter should be checked and cleaned  
periodically to guarantee the fine ventilation and heat  
dissipation for the power supply. When the system has run  
prompt  
for a certain time, the power supply air filter may be filled with  
the dust, and the ventilation and heat dissipation efficiency of  
the power supply may be lower than before. Now, you should  
dismount the plastic panel from the power supply, and clean  
or replace the air filter in the panel.  
Check the air filter:  
„
„
Check whether the air filter is damaged.  
Check the blocking status of the air filter.  
11.1.2.Cleaning and Replacing Air Filter  
The air filter should be cleaned or replaced when the device has been used for a certain time, and the method is  
described as follows:  
1) Dismount  
Dismounting procedures of the air filter in the front panel:  
Press the plastic springs on the both sides of the plastic panel inward,  
and dismount the plastic panel.  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Put the plastic panel on the desk backward, and remove the sponge  
air filter from the panel.  
Dismounting procedures of the air filter in the back panel:  
Unscrew the floating screws from the baffle of the air filter, and  
dismount the air filter baffle.  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Remove the sponge air filter from the panel.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
2) Clean  
Clean the dust from the air filter, wash it with the water, and it can be used after it is aired. On the other hand,  
you can use a new air filter to replace the original one.  
3) Install  
Unfold the air filter, put it in the corresponding position, and attach the  
Step 1  
air filter to the fixing bar by pressing the four sides of the air filter.  
Step 2  
Install the front panel or the baffle of the air filter.  
11.2.Maintenance for Fan Shelf  
The fan shelf should be checked periodically to guarantee the fine ventilation and heat dissipation for the device,  
and the device can run stably.  
11.2.1.Checking Fan Shelf  
You can obtain the information through the alarm indicator status of the fan. The items to be checked:  
Table 1-7 Description of the check items  
Check item  
Description  
Fault diagnosis and  
measures  
Status of fan When the fan is abnormal, the A fault occurs to the fan,  
alarm indicator ALM indicator of the fan module and the fan should be  
is on.  
replaced.  
11.2.2.Replacing Fan Shelf  
The fan shelf provides the heat dissipation function for the system. When a fault occurs to the fan  
shelf, the fan shelf should be replaced immediately. Otherwise, the device will be damaged due to  
overheating. The replacement method is described as follows:  
1.1.1.55  
Dismount the fan shelf  
Step 1  
You must wear the anti-static wrist strap, and the plug of the anti-static  
wrist strap should be plugged in the ESD jack on the front panel of the  
19-inch cabinet with a height of 2.2 m.  
Step 2  
If you need a long time (exceeding five minutes) to examine and repair  
the fan module, you should cut off the power supply of the 3P@C  
4450E system.  
Step 3  
Step 4  
Remove the screws at both ends of the fan module with a screwdriver.  
Press the left end of the white pulled handle in the center of the fan  
module panel, and then the pulled handle appears automatically, as  
shown in the figure below:  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 11-2  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 11-1 Schematic diagram of pulled handle operation  
Alarm indicator  
Press inward  
Screw  
Step 5  
Pull the fan module outward 10 cm by pulling the pulled handle with  
your right hand, and make the fan module leave the power supply  
socket of the interior sub-rack.  
Step 6  
Step 7  
If you dismount the fan module without cutting off the power supply, you  
must wait for a minute before the fan stops running completely.  
Hold the pulled handle of the fan module with your right hand, and pull  
the fan module out of the sub-rack completely by supporting the bottom  
of the fan module with your left hand.  
Step 8  
Put the dismounted fan module in a safe place.  
When the fan shelf is dismounted, the fan may still run. Do  
not contact the fan vane. You should dismount the fan shelf  
only when the fan vane stops running completely.  
Warning  
1.1.1.56  
Install a new fan shelf  
If the fan module is replaced on site without cutting off the  
power supply, you should install the new fan module as soon  
as possible when the original one is dismounted. The new  
fan module should be prepared in advance and put in the  
safe place of the installation site.  
Warning  
Installing the fan support: Use screws to attach the rack-mounting ears  
on both sides of the fan support to the cabinet, as shown in the figure  
below:  
Step 1  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 11-3  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 11-2 Installation of fan support  
Installing the fan module: Plug the fan module into the fan support, and  
fasten the captive screws on the both sides of the support after putting  
the fan module in the corresponding position, as shown in the figure  
below:  
Step 2  
Figure 11-3 Installation of fan module  
Captive screw  
We suggest that you should not clean the fan shelf, and you  
should replace the fan shelf when the fan shelf is damaged or  
there is an alarm.  
prompt  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 11-4  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 12  
12. Line Commissioning and Maintenance  
12.1.Commissioning and Maintenance of ADSL  
Subscriber Line  
12.1.1.ADSL Technical Parameters  
1.1.1.57  
ADSL Signal Frequency Range  
ADSL splits the frequency band through the passive splitter, realizing the common transmission of voices and  
data on the twisted pairs, its signal frequency range is shown as follows:  
Figure 12-1 Frequency range of ADSL  
Downstream  
Upstream  
Frequency  
In this case:  
„
„
„
ADSL upstream signal frequency band: 26KHz—138KHz  
ADSL downstream signal frequency band: 138KHz—1104KHz  
Telephone audio frequency band: 300Hz—  
3,400Hz  
ADSL uses the Discrete Multi-Tone (DMT), and each carrier channel is relatively independent, the occupied  
frequency band width is 4.3125KHz, and each carrier can transmit the data of 0-15 bits in the signal transmission  
stage. Within the range of 0-1.1MHz, it is divided into 256 sub-carrier channels.The application and division of  
ADSL is shown in the figure below:  
Figure 1-1 ADSL carrier channel application and division  
Frequency  
Here:  
„
US indicates Upstream  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
„
DS indicates Downstream  
1.1.1.58  
Related Parameters of ADSL Voice Splitter  
The copper wire bears the original voice signals and the new ADSL signals, because the voice signal takes the  
form of low-frequency signal, but ADSL takes the form of high-frequency signal. We can see from Figure 12-1,  
ADSL frequency range, the voice signal frequency band is 0 ~ 4KHz, but the ADSL signal frequency band is 24K  
~ 1.1MHz.To prevent the high frequency signals from impacting on the voice signals and to ensure the quality of  
communication, the front end of the PSTN switch and the line of the subscriber line end are added with the voice  
splitter. The voice splitter is in fact a Low Pass Filter (LPF), which only permits the voice signals to pass and  
blocks the high frequency ADSL signals. The ADSL voice splitter has the following pass-band characteristics as  
shown in the figure below:  
Figure 12-2 The pass-band characteristics of the ADSL voice splitter  
The voice splitter uses the passive devices, connected on the line in series, so it has a high  
reliability, but with the time elapse, it will also be of aged deterioration, mainly reflecting in the  
following respects:  
„
The increase of the DC loop resistance affects the connection rate of the ADSL line.  
Aging of capacitance affects the communication quality and the ADSL service.  
„
The reference values of the main parameters of the voice splitter is shown in the table below:  
Table 1-8 The reference values for the main parameters of the voice splitter  
Test item  
Condition  
Reference index  
Short-circuit DC resistance  
= 25Ω  
DC resistance (Ω) Line A and B  
Open DC resistance = 5MΩ  
>14+2(f-3) dB  
18dB  
> 18-0.28(f-20) dB  
58 dB  
300-500 Hz  
Reflection  
500-2000 Hz  
attenuation (dB)  
2000-3400 Hz  
200-1000 Hz  
1000-3000 Hz  
Longitudinal  
balance (dB)  
53 dB  
1.1.1.59  
Conditions for ADSL central office end setting  
The Central office terminal of ADSL is the equipment featured by easy management and operation, it can meet  
the demands for different service types through the setting of some constraint-based parameters, and achieve  
the better effect of line connection by the effective and reasonable configuration of the line parameters. The  
setting of ADSL parameters is shown in the table below:  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-2  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Table 12-1 ADSL parameter setting table  
Downstream  
configuration items  
Parameter Upstream configuration  
Parameter  
setting  
Setting  
items  
Maximum  
downstream 255  
Maximum  
upstream 255  
interleaving delay (mS)  
interleaving delay (mS)  
Target downstream noise > = 6  
margin (dB)  
Target upstream noise > =6  
margin (dB)  
Minimum  
noise margin (dB)  
downstream  
0
Minimum upstream noise  
margin (dB)  
0
Minimum  
downstream 32  
downstream 8160  
downstream 31  
Minimum upstream rate 32  
(Kbps)  
Maximum upstream rate 1024  
(Kbps)  
rate (Kbps)  
Maximum  
rate (Kbps)  
Maximum  
Maximum  
downstream 31  
noise margin (dB)  
noise margin (dB)  
Minimum  
training noise margin (dB)  
downstream  
0
Minimum upstream training  
noise margin (dB)  
0
The ADSL equipment produced by Harbor Network Co., Ltd provides the full-rate working mode  
(g.992.1/T1.413) and G.Lite according to the general ADSL standard in the industry. The default working mode  
of the equipment at the central office end is of multi-mode, it is determined by the Modem and the equipment at  
the central office end through negotiation.  
The channel working mode is determined by operators basing on the demands of users, and for those users who  
have high requirements for delay such as VOD, interactive games and conference call; for such services as  
Internet accessing and data downloading, it is recommended to use the interleaving mode.  
The related parameter setting is described as follows:  
„
„
„
„
„
Upon meeting the requirements, the upstream/downstream interleaving delay can be adjusted  
in ms, with the range of 0 to 255, and its default parameter configuration is: 24ms for  
downstream and 16 ms for upstream.  
The out-of-factory default setting of the upstream/downstream minimum noise margin is 0db, it  
is strongly recommended not to modify this value. If this value increases, part of the lines may  
be not able to be synchronized (the users with a line length of over 3km cannot be connected).  
The default configuration for the upstream/downstream maximum noise margin is 31db, in the  
case of good line situations, this parameter can be lowered to achieve the goal of reducing the  
transmission power.  
The default configuration of the target noise margin is 6db, and to lower the value of the target  
noise margin, the synchronization rate of the subscriber line can be increased. Change is not  
recommended.  
The minimum connection rate for upstream and downstream is 32Kbps, it is strongly  
recommended to keep it unchanged. If this value is too high, some lines may not be  
connected or connected unstably, especially when the distance of the line exceeds the 3km  
subscriber line.  
„
„
The maximum upstream/downstream connection rate is an optional value with the range of  
32-896Kbps and 32-7616Kbps, and the specific value can be determined basing on the  
selection of operators. The current general way is to use different rates for charging in  
segments, and the upstream/downstream rate can be divided into multiple levels such as  
128/512Kbps, 512/1024Kbps, and 512/2048Kbps.  
The default value of the minimum training noise margin is 0dB, it is strongly recommended to  
keep it unchanged.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-3  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Factors Affecting the ADSL transmission quality  
„
Subscriber line attenuation  
The attenuation of the ADSL subscriber line is an important factor to affect the ADSL commissioning, relevant to  
the length of lines. In the condition of the 0.4mm twisted pairs, the test data for the subscriber line attenuation is  
shown in the table below:  
Table 12-2 ADSL subscriber line length attenuation table  
Line  
attenuation  
Length  
lines  
Twisted pair  
Downstream  
attenuation  
(dB)  
Adding 30m house parallel  
Upstream  
attenuation  
(dB)  
Downstream  
attenuation  
(dB)  
Upstream  
attenuation  
(dB)  
of  
1km  
22.0  
16.0  
24.0  
16.5  
2km  
40.0  
28.5  
44.5  
30.0  
3km  
56.5  
40.0  
58.5  
41.5  
4km  
63.5  
51.0  
65.5  
51.5  
The greater the degree of attenuation of the subscriber line is, the lower the connection rate of subscriber line  
becomes. The subscriber line will exceed the limit for commissioning the ADSL service when it exceeds a certain  
length and its attenuation becomes extremely high.  
The above is the attenuation pair standard determined by the line length. In the same way, the Ministry  
of Posts and Telecommunications definitely provides the requirements on line attenuation (per  
kilometer) within different frequency bands, and different core diameters lead to different degrees of  
attenuation, for details, see the table below:  
Table 12-3 ADSL line attenuation per kilometer within different frequency bands  
f0  
(kHz)  
Core diameter  
attenuation  
(dB)  
40  
60  
80  
120  
150  
300  
1,024  
0.32mm  
0.4mm  
0.5mm  
11.40  
8.29  
5.99  
13.01 14.38  
15.12  
10.87  
7.77  
16.80  
12.10  
9.00  
18.13  
14.78  
12.18  
33.50  
27.30  
22.50  
9.34  
6.85  
10.05  
7.06  
„
Crosstalk interference  
When there are multiple ADSL subscribers in the same cable, or there are HDSL subscribers, ISDN subscribers  
or the data transmission subscribers in other modes, the crosstalk interface would occur, and the characteristics  
of the channel will vary along with the number of such subscribers, enabling/disabling status and the changes of  
transmission rate. Based on the analysis on ADSL, HDSL and ISDN by means of transmission spectrum, the  
ISDN service can basically ignore the crosstalk interference from the ADSL service due to its low frequency  
band, and the ADSL equipment using the FDM technology can minimize the affects of crosstalk only against the  
ADSL line due to its separation of upstream/downstream frequency bands. The cross-talk interference mainly  
comes from the NEXT-NearEndCrosstalk (The cross-talk interference of the interference source on the receiver  
of the interference line pair in the case that the interference source and the receiver of the interfered line pairs  
are at the same end) of HDSL and the comprehensive FEXT-FarEndCrosstalk (The cross-talk interference of the  
interference source on the receiver of the interference line pair in the case that the interference source and the  
receiver of the interfered line pairs are far from each other) of many other ADSL line pairs.  
The non-symmetric design of the ADSL rate allows a low rate of the upstream signal and low frequency band  
occupied, the crosstalk is less at the user end accordingly and the office end is easy to be controlled both in line  
connection and pair arrangement, which is favorable to control crosstalks. Crosstalk generally occurs to the  
connector of lines and the fault point of lines, and at the user end, generally the house line uses the parallel  
cable, to which the crosstalk is easy to occur.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-4  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
To reduce the crosstalk interference, the subscribers with the approximate length of subscriber line should be  
placed on the same subscriber board or in the same pair cables; the ADSL subscriber line should be kept far  
from the ISDN subscriber line as much as possible.  
„
Noise  
The noise are mostly background noises from lines, radio-frequency interference from the electrical equipment  
near the lines and such radio interferences as narrowband peak noise signals of AM broadcast, the affect of  
these interferences on lines is of long-term, and its impact on the transmission rate is reflected on the  
deterioration of SNR index of each sub-channel.  
„
Pulse noise  
The pulse noise refers to the outburst discrete pulse interference, it has a large amplitude and the duration is far  
shorter than the time interval. The possible sources are the ringing signals from telephones, human-made  
electric sparks (auto ignition, power line), and large power transfer. The spectrum of the pulse noise is very wide,  
which can affect many sub-channels, but the amplitude at the frequency points is lowered accordingly, and its  
affect on the specific sub-channel is slighter than the noise of narrow frequency band. The pulse noise is hard to  
be tested because it occurs randomly, and at present, no specific index requirement is available. The test value  
within a period of time does not exceed this test pulse according to the test pulse noise model in the  
transmission loss of the ADSL standard.  
„
Telephone interference:  
In addition to the interferences in ringing, off-hook and on-hook, the non-linearity of the telephone during  
conversation will also affect the data service. The test abroad shows that the non-linearity phenomenon does not  
occur when the power of the upstream signals sent by each telephone set should be lowered by 12db in  
average, and to some telephone sets, 24 db should be lowered. This means that the difference in the  
performance of the phone set will affect the quality of data transmission.  
„
Reflection interference  
The bridged tap is a short line reaching somewhere, and the non-termination tap can emit energy, lower the  
strength of signals and become a noise source. There are at least 3 connectors (bridge point) from the Central  
office terminal to subscribers, the core diameter of each connector will change accordingly, and the cable loss  
leads to the abrupt resistance change, thus causing the loss of power reflection wave. It takes the form of  
echoes in the voice communication while in ADSL, the complex modulation mode is very easy to be affected by  
the reflection signals. Currently, there is no such equipment as testing the reflection source in the subscriber  
allocation cables in the frequency of 300KHz or above. At present, the echo cancellation technology is mostly  
used and it is excellent in the cancellation of echo effect from a certain source. When the signals, however, are  
reflected in many places, the echo cancellation is hardly effective.  
12.1.2.ADSL Line Commissioning  
1.1.1.60  
Connection, Configuration and Test of Central office terminal  
1) Connecting the ADSL equipment  
Subscribers need to remove the original jumpers at the distribution frame upon applying for the commissioning of  
ADSL service, and connect the distribution lines and jumpers again basing on the situation of the ADSL  
equipment, to separate the traditional PSTN service from the data service, as shown in Figure 12-4.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-5  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 12-3 ADSL distribution  
Here:  
„
„
„
P refers to the distribution frame of program-control switch  
W refers to the PSTN distribution frame of the ADSL equipment  
N refers to the subscriber line distribution frame for the ADSL equipment  
2) ADSL parameter configuration  
Based on the service types selected by subscribers, the ports related to the ADSL Central office terminal should  
be configured with the related parameters, which includes the ADSL working mode, channel working mode, the  
interleaving depth in the interleaving mode, upstream/downstream destination noise margin,  
upstream/downstream maximum/minimum rate. These parameters are relevant to the QoS and functions of  
subscribers.  
3) Testing the ADSL connection parameters  
After the ADSL equipment has finished with its jumper setting in the distribution room, the connection test needs  
to be done in the actual environment, to ensure the commissioning of the ADSL service.  
The Harbor Network Co., Ltd sets the parameters as follows in the full configuration of the laboratory equipment  
based on the reality of lines.  
„
„
„
„
Target noise 6db  
Maximum downstream rate 8160Kbps  
Maximum upstream rate 1024Kbps  
Interleaving mode, upstream/downstream interleaving depth of 24 ms  
And in the case of 0.4mm core diameter, the test reference data is as follows:  
Table 12-4 ADSL line connection parameters  
Cabl  
es  
Leng rate  
Downs Upstre Downs Upstre Downstream Line  
Central  
office  
output  
tream  
am  
tream  
noise  
am  
attenuation  
Line  
upstrea  
m
rate  
noise  
th  
(km)  
(Kbps) (Kbps) margi  
n (dB)  
margin downstream attenuati Power  
(dB)  
attenuation  
(dB)  
22  
on (dB)  
output  
(dB)  
20  
1
2
3
4
7616  
6624  
3552  
1184  
896  
896  
768  
448  
8
6
6
7
7
6
5
6
15.5  
28  
40.5  
21  
56.5  
63.5  
39.5  
50  
18  
15  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-6  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
1. The value of target noise margin (such as 12 db) can be  
raised to improve the stability of the line connection.  
2. In the practice, the house parallel exerts a great impact on  
the connection rate, and this impact is especially obvious when  
the subscriber cable exceeds 2.5km, so it is recommended to  
reduce the application length of the house parallel.  
prompt  
1.1.1.61  
Testing the ADSL Subscriber Line  
There are certain requirements of the ADSL service commissioning on the subscriber lines:  
„
„
„
„
No loading coils should be placed on line.  
Better to use twisted pairs (paralleled iron wires and aluminium wires should not exceed 20 m)  
No special requirements are imposed on the line shielding  
In principle, no bridged tap should exist, even if so, its length should be less than 400m, and  
the distance of it from the two ends should not be less than 400m, and the quantity of it not  
exceed 2.  
„
„
The DC loop resistance is required not more than 1.1 kΩ  
The near-end protection ratio in terms of cable crosstalk should be more than 50db, while the  
far-end protection ratio is equivalent to the former plus the line attenuation.  
The normal line resistance is 100 Ω with the required error of not more than 10%.  
The idle channel noise is required not more than -55dB, that is, the mean noise power  
spectrum density is not more than -115dBm/Hz.  
„
„
„
Within the range of ADSL service frequency band of 26K-1104KHz, the longitudinal  
conversion loss is not less than 50dB, and in special cases, it is allowed to be more than  
40dB.  
Before the subscriber line is commissioned, the following checks should be made:  
„
First, check the distance between subscribers and the 3P@C 4450E equipment, if it is above  
2km, the materials for the house line should be strictly chosen, and the parallels of aluminium  
or iron should not be used but the copper twisted pairs.  
„
„
„
Check the proper contact of the house lines.  
Check the proper insulation of the house lines.  
Check the existence of radio sources around the house lines, including transmitting station  
and arc welder.  
„
Check how many devices are connected in series and parallel on the house line, such as  
telephones, fax machines, charge registers, extensions of telephone, audio Modem, and IP  
dialer, and make the detailed records for locating problems in maintenance.  
In addition, the subscriber line parameters should also be measured in respects of internal and external  
measurements:  
„
The internal measurement refers to the measurement on the distribution frame in the  
distribution room.  
„
The external measurement refers to the measurement of external lines.  
Here, the internal measurement can be done simply by means of Modem or the handheld terminals which is  
directly connected to 3P@C 4450E for test, and the status of lines can be judged by viewing the actual  
connection parameters. Or the multimeter is used to measure the line parameters, including voltage,  
capacitance and resistance. The detailed methods are as follows:  
Voltage measurement  
Disconnect the equipment from the tested lines, and select the DC voltage gear of the multimeter  
to measure the voltage of –48V and BGND line from the external connecting terminals, the value  
after measurement is the DC voltage of the subscriber line.  
Select the AC gear of the multimeter to measure the AC voltage between Line A and B separately, the AC  
voltage between Line A and the ground and the AC voltage between Line B and the ground.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-7  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Capacitance measurement  
Disconnect the tested lines from the switch, and select the capacitance measurement gear of the digital  
multimeter by connecting it with the external terminal, A and B lines, to measure the capacitance between Line A  
and Line B, that is, the capacitance C a-b between Line A and Line B. In the same way, the capacitance of Line  
A to the ground, C a-gnd and the capacitance of Line B to the ground, C b-gnd.  
Resistance measurement  
Disconnect the tested lines from the switch, and select the resistance gear of the digital multimeter by  
connecting it with the external terminal, A and B lines, to measure the insulation resistance between Line A and  
Line B, that is, the insulation resistance R a-b between Line A and Line B. In the same way, the insulation  
resistance of Line A to the ground, R a-gnd and the insulation resistance of Line B to the ground, R b-gnd.  
Similarly, the loop resistance of the subscriber line can also be measured, and the way is to loop at remote end,  
and connect Line A with Line B shortly, and disconnect the local A and B lines from the switch; use the digital  
multimeter to connect the local A and B terminals, and select the resistance gear of the multimeter to read the  
measurement resistance, that is, the tested DC loop resistance. The table below gives the reference values of  
the DC loop resistance for subscriber lines with different core diameters per kilometer:  
Table 12-5 DC loop resistance for subscriber lines with different core diameters per  
kilometer  
Core diameter (mm)  
Loop resistance (Ω/km)  
0.32  
470  
0.4  
280  
0.5  
190  
In practice, it may be the subscriber line of mixed core diameters, in this case, we should give it a  
comprehensive consideration, the DC loop resistance of subscriber line should not be more than 1.1 kΩ. For the  
external measurement, some parameter index of the external lines can be tested by means of 112 test terminal.  
Through the measurement of the actual subscriber line, a reference table will be given for guiding the  
commissioning of the ADSL service, and the details are shown in the table below:  
Table 12-6 Line test reference table  
AC voltage  
(VAC)  
V a-b  
0V  
V a-gnd  
0V  
V b-gnd  
0V  
DC voltage  
(VDC)  
V a-b  
0V  
V a-gnd  
0V  
V b-gnd  
0V  
Resistance  
R
a-b loop R a-gnd  
R b-gnd  
R a-b insulation  
resistance  
>5MΩ  
(Ω)  
core resistance  
diameter:  
0.4mm  
280Ω/km  
>5MΩ  
>5MΩ  
Capacitanc  
C
a-b load C a-gnd  
C b-gnd  
C a-b on-hook  
e (uF) core open-circuit  
diameter:  
0.4mm  
45-55nF/km  
30-40nF/km  
30-40nF/km >0.35uF  
Based on the above table, we can make an analysis on the line status:  
„
„
„
Judge whether there is tap of power line by viewing the AC voltage.  
Judge whether there is swinging cross by viewing the DC voltage, V a-gnd and V b-gnd.  
Judge the insulation of Line A and B -ground by viewing the resistance values, R a-gnd and R  
b-gnd, and the test value of the actual line may not reach more than 5MΩ as required by the  
national standard. The reason is for this is mainly the impact of the line environment, for  
example, regional climate difference leads to the difference in line status, or different humidity  
conditions, poor water-releasing performance of the junction box, the resistance of R a-gnd  
and R b-gnd is lower than 200kΩ which is the lowest standard for commissioning the ADSL  
line, so the ADSL service is easy to be interrupted.  
„
The open line test requires to inform users to remove all the devices on the subscriber line for  
measurement. C a-b is 45~55nF per kilometer, and the normality of the C a-b value can be  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-8  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
judged basing on the length of loop. The value for commissioning the ADSL service line is  
lower than 170nF.  
„
„
View the value of C a-gnd and C b-gnd, requiring the difference between these two should be  
less than 5%, the consistency between the C a-gnd and C b-gnd values reflects the quality of  
the parameters for Line A and B -ground balance. If these two values are greatly different, the  
connection rate and stability of ADSL would be affected.  
R a-b insulation resistance should be more than 200kΩ in normal condition, if less than this  
value, the subscriber line may suspend other devices, such as charge register, IP dialer and  
inquiry station dialing limiter.  
Before commissioning, the parameters of subscriber lines should be  
tested to ensure the commissioning of the ADSL service.  
Note  
1.1.1.62  
Connection, Testing and Commissioning of User End Devices  
1) Connection splitter  
The ADSL service is the traditional voice and data services run on a twisted pair, requiring the installation of  
splitter at the user end to separate voice from data. The correct installation of ADSL splitters is a key step in the  
process of ADSL service commissioning.  
The house line should be first connected into the Line port of the ADSL splitter, and all the audio devices should  
be connected to the Phone port of the splitter and ADSL Modem to the Modem port.  
The practice of connecting to any voice devices before the Line port  
of the splitter should be prohibited, or else, Modem cannot work  
normally.  
Note  
The method for correctly connecting the splitter is shown in the figure below:  
Figure 12-4 Connection of splitters  
Fax machine  
External line  
Splitter  
Telephone  
Extension  
Computer  
Some Modems are in-built with splitters, and the connection of the  
ports can be done as shown in the figure above.  
Note  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-9  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
2) Testing and Commissioning of Modem  
First, the test can be done by directly connecting the Modem from the junction box of users (If there is no power  
supply, the handheld Modem is needed), and by comparing the connection parameters of Modem, we can judge  
the normality of backbone cables and the wire-bonding of the distribution frame. Parameters are as follows:  
Table 12-7 ADSL service line reference table  
Core diameter = 0.4mm  
1,500  
m
2,000  
m
3,000  
m
Line length  
1,000m  
6,144  
640  
2,500m  
3,168  
608  
Downs  
tream  
Upstre  
am  
Downli  
nk  
6,144  
640  
27  
4,928  
640  
36  
2,016  
576  
48  
Maximum  
connection rate  
(Kbps)  
18  
43  
Line  
attenuation  
(dB)  
Upstre  
am  
12  
18  
24  
30  
36  
Core diameter = 0.32mm  
Downs  
tream  
Maximum  
connection rate  
(Kbps)  
6,144  
640  
22  
5,408  
640  
33  
4,096  
616  
42  
1,920  
576  
50  
816  
528  
56  
Uplink  
Downli  
nk  
Upstre  
am  
Line  
attenuation  
(dB)  
14  
21  
28  
35  
42  
The results of actual line measurement may be somewhat different (the line length is known), the attenuation  
differs by 3~4db, which should be within the permitted range. If differing too much, the line connector may exist  
problems, and need to be checked. And the case of normal attenuation measurement but too low connection  
rate may occur, this can be the result of too much line noise. If the upstream rate is low, there may be  
interferences of the nearby pairs to the ISDN service; if the downstream rate is low, the poor balance of  
peripheral pairs may be the reason, which leads to much noise. If the connection rate of Modem is basically  
matched with the reference table, users can commission the ADSL service.  
In addition, the correctness of VPI/VCI setting and protocol encapsulation format of Modem is correct.  
1.1.1.63  
Recording the User Information and Relevant Data  
For the convenience of the later operation maintenance, the user information and the data for the initially  
commissioned line connection. For details, see Table 12-9 and 12-10:  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-10  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Table 12-8 Broadband service user information record table  
User  
address  
Name  
Certificate  
number  
Modem  
serial No.  
ADSL  
VDSL  
Others  
Multiplexing  
telephone  
Service type  
Appl Upstr  
icati eam  
on  
Contact  
VPI/VCI  
User type  
Port  
for  
Dow  
nstre  
am  
ban  
dwi  
dth  
Position of  
distribution  
frame  
Serial No. for external line Serial No. for the internal line P cross  
vertical board position board position  
Distribution  
records  
Serial No. for the internal line Serial No. for the internal line W cross  
N cross board position  
board position  
AC voltage  
V a-b  
V a-gnd  
V a-gnd  
V b-gnd  
Length of loop  
(VAC)  
DC voltage  
V a-b  
V b-gnd  
R b-gnd  
C b-gnd  
(VDC)  
112  
external  
R
a-b  
line  
test  
Resistance  
R
a-b loop  
R a-gnd  
C a-gnd  
insulation  
resistance  
data  
(Ω)  
resistance  
Capacitanc  
e (uF)  
C
a-b load  
C a-b on-hook  
open-circuit  
Table 12-9 ADSL setting parameters and connection parameter record table  
Set the restraint parameters  
[ ]  
[ ]  
Channel  
working  
mode  
G.dmt  
[ ]  
[ ]  
Fast  
ADSL  
Working  
mode  
G.lite  
Interleaved  
Up(ms)  
[ ]  
[ ]  
T1.413  
Interleavi  
ng depth  
Multimode  
Upstream  
Down(ms)  
Upstream  
Target  
noise  
Minimum  
noise  
margin  
(dB)  
Maximum  
rate  
margin  
(dB)  
Maximum  
rate  
Downlink  
Upstream  
Downstream  
Upstream  
(Kbps)  
(Kbps)  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-11  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Downstream  
Downstream  
Actual connection parameters  
G.dmt: [ ]  
G.lite: [ ]  
Fast:  
[ ]  
Channel working mode  
Interleaved:[ ]  
Current working mode of  
lines  
Upstream  
interleave (ms)  
T1.413: [ ]  
d delay  
Downstre  
am (ms)  
Multimode:[ ]  
Downstream  
rate (Kbps)  
connection  
Upstream connection  
rate (Kbps)  
Downstream noise margin  
(dB)  
Upstream noise margin  
(dB)  
Downstream  
line  
Upstream  
line  
attenuation (dB)  
attenuation (dB)  
Downstream output power  
(dB)  
Upstream output power  
(dB)  
12.1.3.ADSL Line Maintenance  
1.1.1.64  
ADSL Users’ Common Faults and Handling  
The common faults reported by the ADSL users can be divided into five categories as follows:  
„
„
„
„
„
Unable to make calls and access the Internet.  
Able to make calls but cannot access the Internet.  
Able to access the Internet, but the speed for accessing is slow.  
Unstable Internet accessing, and often being disconnected.  
Others. Other faults in addition to the above four kinds of fault. Internet accessing is possible  
but calls cannot be made, or noises exist in telephone.  
Specific description:  
„
Unable to make calls and access the Internet.  
In general, it is the fault of lines, which should be reported to the 112 test terminal. First exclude the line failure  
and check whether the Internet accessing is possible after the telephone can be normally used.  
„
Able to make calls but cannot access the Internet.  
The cause for failure may be related to all the devices or links in the broadband network structure. The causes  
for failure can be further located by obtaining the information, such as the status of the Modem (RTU) indicator  
and operation and setting of the user computer operation. The detailed procedures are as follows:  
1) Inquiry and record the model and indicator status of Modem.  
The English abbreviation IDs of the RTU indicator for different models may vary, but in general, the Ethernet port  
indicators, ADSL connection indicator and power indicator.  
2) Judge the faults based on the status of indicators.  
Power status of power indicators  
If the RTU power indicator is off, it indicates that the RTU power supply has not been properly connected or is  
the result of RTU failure; if the RTU power supply is confirmed to be normal, but all the RTU indicators are not  
on, it surely is the RTU failure. If the power supply is properly connected, and the RTU power indicator is on, but  
the Internet accessing is still impossible, the following analysis can be continued.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-12  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Status of the ADSL LINK Indicator  
The green ADSL LINK (WAN for some Modems) indicator is constantly on, indicating the normal connection of  
WAN, that is, the normal connection of the ADSL line. The ADSL LINK indicator is off, indicating Modem works  
abnormally, and it should be powered on and connected again to see whether normal work is possible.  
The ADSL LINK indicator is flashing intermittently, indicating that the ADSL line is being connected or unable to  
be connected. This is the problem of lines. First check whether the splitter is installed in the proper position, the  
telephone wire to the splitter is properly connected, and check the contact of the telephone connectors, and  
whether the telephone line passes such interference sources as TV set or speakers, if so, it must be kept far  
away from them, and you should report to the 112 test terminal for checking the external lines if the problem still  
exists.  
Status of the LAN LINK Indicator  
The green or orrange indicator of ADSL LINK (LAN for some Modems) is constantly on, indicating the normal  
connection of the Ethernet. Green indicates a data transmission rate of 10Mbps, while orange indicates a data  
transmission rate of 100Mbps (but different Modems can be defined differently, for details, see the use manual of  
Modem). If LAN LINK indicator is not on, it indicates the improper connection of RTU with the network adapter of  
computers, or the computer network adapter failure (the normality of 2 indicators of the network adapter can be  
the reference).After confirming the proper connections, check the normality of the network adapter of the  
computer, and you should install the driver or change the network adapter if necessary.  
Status of the ADSL ACT Indicator  
The ADSL ACT indicator flashes, indicating that the external network between the computer and RTU is  
transmitting data, and the communication is normal.  
Status of the LAN ACT Indicator  
The LAN ACT indicator flashes, indicating there is data traffic on the Ethernet.  
3) Locating and handling the problems of user end devices, user application or upstream ports.  
If the indicators of the above Modem show the normal status, but the user still fails to access the Internet, it can  
be said to be the problems of user end devices, user application or upstream ports.  
troubleshooting work can be continued according to the following methods:  
The location and  
1} In general, the users are accessed in PPPoE mode. First check the possibility of reaching the PPPoE  
authentication stage, if so but fails to authenticate, or the normal accessing the Internet after the successful  
authentication, the problems may lie in the upper layer of the access server. Next, the data management office  
should be responsible for checking other ports.  
2) If the PPPoE dialing cannot be normally started, it is generally the problem of user dialing software, and install  
the software again and to give it a try after correctly setting the computer.  
3) The user computer has the following typical problems for application:  
„
TCP/IP attribute setting error. The IP address should be “automatically obtaining the IP  
address”.  
„
„
Whether the dialing account format and the password are correct.  
Improper installation of dialing software.  
4) PPPoE authentication is successful, but the Internet accessing is impossible, you may change to other  
websites, if they all cannot be accessed, the problem can lie in the access server. or lie in the website.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-13  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
„
Able to access the Internet, but the speed for accessing is slow.  
1) Whether the rate of Internet accessing is fast sometimes and slow at other times, or slow all along.  
If it is slow all along, and the rate is below 500Kbps(60KByte ps), it is generally the problem of lines. The data  
office NMS can be used to view the physical connection rate, and whether the ports have the limited rate and to  
what extent the rate is limited. If the physical connection rate is high, it cannot be the problem of lines, and no  
expansion of the broadband access server port may the cause. In addition, if the rate for accessing the Internet  
has reached up to the port limit rate, the problem may lie in the limited port rate.  
2) The line is quite short, but the rate for accessing the Internet cannot reach up to 2Mbps at all, first check the  
physical connection rate of this port through the data office NMS and the line attenuation. If the physical  
connection rate reaches up to 2Mbps or the rate limit, it shows the line is normal. In this case, check the setting  
of interleaving depth. If the interleaving depth is 64, the TFTP files can be transmitted at a rate of  
1.5Mbps(180KBps) at most due to the restriction of TCP/IP.  
3) The physical connection rate of the port can be queried through the data office, and if the physical connection  
rate is quite different from the file transmission rate, it is generally the bottleneck problem of upstream interface  
node rate if the physical connection rate is normal.  
4) Long lines, much line noise and poor quality of house lines may be the cause of the slow Internet accessing.  
„
Able to access the Internet, but unstable, and often being disconnected.  
This problem is often the result of too large high-frequency attenuation due to poor quality of lines or too long  
lines, too much line noise and poor contact of lines, the following points can be the reference for problem  
judgment:  
1) First make a judgment as to whether the line exceeds 3km, if so, the line may be too long, or this problem still  
exists in the ADSL subscribers around.  
2) Check whether the front end of Modem is connected to other voice devices, such as IP dialer, which should  
be removed.  
3) Check whether the splitter is installed in the proper position. It is recommended to install it to the entrance of  
the telephone line.  
4) In disconnection, check whether a call is made or other electrical devices are used. Judge whether there is  
any interference equipment.  
5) Check the connectors of the house line and the plugs of the telephone wires, the aging of connectors and the  
damages to the socket springs. Check the quality of house lines.  
6) Check the connection configuration parameters and the connection parameters conditions of the related ports  
on the DSLAM equipment.  
7) Use the 112 to test the external lines in terms of length and attenuation, and analyze the test data.  
„
Others  
The faults rather than the above four are described as other faults, and make a detailed record about them.For  
example, you can access the Internet but cannot make calls, which is generally the problem of line connectors.  
This kind of faults may be the problem of house lines or ADSL connection. The specific description is as follows:  
1) Common faults of house lines  
The ADSL service faults generally occur to the house line, the following are the typical faults:  
(1) Improper contact between the line plugs and the line socket, or insufficient elasticity of the spring steel wires  
or it is deviated.  
(2) The sockets of Line A and B become damp (especially in South with much rain), which leads to the lowering  
of the insulation resistance of Line A and B or short-circuit -ground.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-14  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
(3) The connectors of Line A and B have not wrapped properly with insulation tape, and frequent short-circuits  
occur due to the external force.  
(4) The splitter is not properly used, and its external interfaces are connected with telephone extensions, fax  
machines, IP dialers and audio Modems in series and parallel.  
(5) When the subscriber line exceeds 2.5km, the house line uses the too long parallels of aluminium or iron.  
(6) The house line passes the radio sources that affect the ADSL service transmission.  
2) Common faults in ADSL connection  
The problem of the ADSL connection is reflected by users’ incapable of normally accessing the Internet. The  
causes and handling mode for this problem boils down to the following aspects:  
(1) The subscriber line failure: It is recommended to check short circuits or circuit break of the telephone set.  
(2) Modem failure, the power-on/off is used to judge whether the Modem can be normally started.  
(3) Check the Modem indicator, if the Link indicator is off, it indicates the broken connection of Modem.  
(4) Check the correctness of the in-door splitter connection, and the addition of audio devices and telephone  
extensions at the front interfaces of the splitter.  
1.1.1.65  
Case Analysis  
1) Synchronization of subscriber ADSL Modem impossible  
It is one of the common problems in the ADSL application, and there are many causes for this. Including:  
„
„
„
„
„
Quality of ADSL Modem  
Irrational wiring  
Environmental factors  
Line fault  
Office equipment configuration  
The faults are generally removed in the way of segmental test, and the test instruments are used if necessary.  
Case Background  
In the implementation of ADSL number allocation, the ADSL Modem of a subscriber cannot be synchronized all  
along, but the same Modem can be normally synchronized in the 0-kilometer test. The home of the subscriber  
should be 2.6km or so away from the office end equipment.  
Fault symptom  
Correctly connect the splitter, telephone sets and Modems, and the Modem cannot be synchronized.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-15  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Analysis and troubleshooting:  
Step 1  
The 0km test is done on the central office distribution frame, and this  
Modem can be normally synchronized. So, the Modem should be of  
no problem.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Step 4  
In testing the telephone, calls can be normally made. There should be  
no problem to the splitter, and it is installed in the proper position.  
The environment for installing Modem indoors should excluded with  
high-power devices, such as refrigerator, monitor and TV sets.  
In checking the house line, it is found that it is the parallel and aged  
seriously. And after the further investigation, the house parallel is  
found to be the common wires with a length of 80m or so. The line is  
exposed under the sun, and the junctions of the connector are not so  
firm. It is the result of unreliable house lines after analysis. The high  
frequency attenuation of the parallel is great and the connection  
quality is also poor, which leads the ADSL signal not to be normally  
borne.  
Step 5  
Change the house line into the copper twisted pair of 0.4mm, and  
everything becomes normal after the remaking of connectors for each  
parts, and Modem can be synchronized and calls can be normally  
made. This problem is solved.  
Summary  
The problem of house line quality is one of the common faults of external line.  
The synchronization of ADSL Modem should be achieved in the  
respect of Modem, backbone, house line, splitter, routing method  
and peripheral environment, and a correct conclusion can be  
Note  
obtained with the above factors excluded.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-16  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
12.2.Commissioning and Maintenance of the VDSL  
Subscriber Line  
12.2.1.VDSL Technical Parameters  
1.1.1.66  
VDSL Signal Frequency Range  
The VDSL access equipment of Harbor uses the VDSL system based on the IP transmission mode, and the  
modulation mode is QAM, and the used signal frequency range is shown in the figure below:  
Figure 12-5 VDSL frequency range  
Upstream  
Downstream  
The spectrum of VDSL, POTS, ISDN, HDSL, SDSL, and ADSL is  
not cross-connected. The VDSL service can co-exist with ADSL in  
the same wire bundle.  
prompt  
1.1.1.67  
Key Technical Parameters for VDSL (Terminal resistance, PSD, SNR)  
„
On the full band of VDSL, the output resistance of the equipment is 100Ω, and this resistance  
can be matched with different types of non-shielded twisted pairs of most access networks.  
The downstream and upstream signal powers are 10dBm(10mW).  
The total maximum transmission power as required by the national standard does not exceeds  
14.5dBm.  
„
„
„
„
PSD (Power Spectral Density): When the frequency is any value between 25kHz and 12MHz,  
the transmission power spectrum density value of the upstream signals cannot exceed -  
53dBm/Hz; the transmission power spectrum density value cannot exceed -60dBm/Hz when  
the downstream signal is between 138kHz-3.75MHz; the transmission power spectrum density  
value cannot exceed -53dBm/Hz -60dBm/Hz when the downstream signal is between 8.5MHz-  
12MHz.  
SNR (Signal Noise Ratio, that is, the ratio between signal power in the channel and the noise  
power): the SNR value reflects the quality of the VDSL signal transmission on the line.  
1.1.1.68  
Factors Affecting the VDSL Transmission Quality  
The following factors can affect the transmission quality of the VDSL service:  
Line length  
„
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-17  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
The line length determines the attenuation and delay of transmission, which is the most important factor to  
determine the VDSL transmission distance. In practice, other possible factors should be combined for  
consideration. The following only lists the experience value for reference:  
In the environment of cells, the 0.4mm cable can be used for commissioning 1km/ symmetry/12.5M;  
In the central office, the 0.32mm cable can be used for commissioning 1km/non-symmetry/downstream 4.17M  
and upstream 1.56M.  
„
Insulation resistance  
Usually, the insulation resistance between the insulation wire and the ground, and between shielded insulation  
wires should not be less than 30M.  
„
Crosstalk interference  
Since the transmission distance of VDSL is shorter than ADSL, and the power is low, NEXT (Near End  
Crosstalk) can be ignored, so the crosstalk interference mainly refers to FEXT (Far End Crosstalk). The PBO  
(Power Backoff) of VDSL mechanism can automatically adjust the transmission power according to the size of  
SNR, thus making the crosstalk the smallest.  
„
Line attenuation  
The line transmission attenuation can result in the weakening of signals, thus communication cannot be  
established or a large number of outburst error codes can occur in the transmission process. The main factor to  
affect the attenuation is the cable length, core diameter and the quantity of pairs in the harness.  
„
Pulse noise  
The pulse noise refers to the outburst discrete pulse interference, it has a large amplitude and the duration is far  
shorter than the time interval. The source of pulse noise may be the ringing signals of telephone and the human  
electric sparks (Such as auto ignition, electric power), the power switching of large power (for example, the  
telephone lines are paralleled with the electric power in the elevator well). The pulse noise is hard to be tested  
because it occurs randomly, and at present, no specific index requirement is available. VDSL provides the  
interleaving function, to effectively avoid some pulse noises, which can reach up to 300ms at most, while 90% of  
the pulse noise can last for less than 200ms.  
„
Idle channel noise  
This is the background noise, a main parameter for calculating SNR.  
The factor to affect VDSL connection rate is the attenuation of the transmission distance to the upstream high  
frequency band. as shown in the table below:  
Table 12-10 The minimum SNR value for the rates (for reference)  
1.56M,1.04M  
12.5M,8.33M,4.17M, 8.33M,4.17M,2.08M  
2.08M  
1.04 M  
QAM4  
QAM16  
19 dB  
25 dB  
X
12.5 M  
QAM64  
31 dB  
Analyzing based on the above table, the low rate does not necessarily mean the low requirements for line  
quality, but is determined by the QAM points. That’s why the connection of the symmetric 2.08M/2.08M is not so  
stable as the non-symmetric 4.17M/1.56M (the default rate mode) in the poor condition of lines, because the  
minimum SNR of the upstream 2.08M is 25dB, higher than 19dB of the upstream 1.56M.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-18  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
„
Echo  
The echo is the reflection wave caused by the unbalance of line resistance or the bridge equipment in the line.  
The echo would result in the loss of signal energy, and extra interference the line, especially greatly affecting the  
full-duplex service transmission quality of broadband. The changes in the Line A-B capacitance and Line A/B-  
ground capacitance and inter-line insulation resistance and ground insulation resistance will lead to the change  
of line resistance to generate echo, and cause attenuation and interference to the VDSL signal. The use of  
resistance matching technology and the echo elimination circuit can help reduce the affect of echo. The  
resistance of VDSL to the transmission line is required to be the 100Ω pure resistor.  
12.2.2.VDSL Line Commissioning  
1.1.1.69  
Connection, Configuration and Test of Office End Equipment  
1) Connection of the VDSL equipment  
Subscribers need to remove the original jumpers at the distribution frame upon applying for the commissioning of  
VDSL service, and connect the distribution lines and jumpers again basing on the situation of the VDSL  
equipment, to separate the traditional PSTN service from the data service, as shown in Figure 12-7.  
Figure 12-6 VDSL distribution  
Here:  
„
„
„
P refers to the distribution frame of program-control switch  
W refers to the PSTN distribution frame of the VDSL equipment  
N refers to the subscriber line distribution frame for the VDSL equipment  
2} VDSL parameter configuration  
Based on the service types selected by subscribers, the ports related to the VDSL office end equipment should  
be configured with the related parameters, including the VDSL upstream/downstream rates, auto-adaptation  
mode, Ethernet rate and duplex mode. These parameters are relevant to the QoS and functions of subscribers.  
3) Testing the VDSL connection parameters  
After the VDSL equipment has finished with its jumper setting in the distribution room, the connection test needs  
to be done in the actual environment, to ensure the commissioning of the VDSL service.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-19  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
1.1.1.70  
Testing the VDSL Subscriber Line  
There are certain requirements of the VDSL service commissioning on the subscriber lines:  
„
„
The DC loop resistance is required not more than 300 Ω.  
The nominal resistance (the AC resistance between twisted pairs) of lines is 100Ω, and the  
error is required to be not more than 10%.  
„
„
„
„
„
The lines cannot be attached with loading coils, and the practice of attaching the loading coils  
on the subscriber line is rare in China.  
Better to use twisted pairs (paralleled iron wires and aluminium wires should not exceed 20  
m).  
There are no special requirements for the shielding of lines; in principle, there should not exist  
the bridged tap.  
It is recommended to use in community, buildings or new branch offices but not in large  
central offices, factories and roadside.  
After the disconnection of Line A and B, the Line A-B, Line A/B-ground AC/DC voltage is  
about 0V, and the result of below 1V is normal in the test by means of multimeter or 112 test  
terminal.  
„
„
The Line A-B insulation resistance and the Line A/B-ground should be more than 5M?.  
The length of subscriber lines can be basically calculated according to the inter-line  
capacitance of 50Nf/km, or the loop resistance. The DC resistance reference value of the  
common lines is shown in the table below:  
Table 12-11 DC resistance reference value of common lines  
Diameter (mm)  
DC resistance  
(Ω/km)  
0.32  
236  
0.4  
148  
0.5  
95  
0.6  
65.8  
0.8  
36.6  
Before the subscriber line is commissioned, check the quantity of devices being connected in series and parallel  
on the house line, such as telephones, fax machines, charge registers, extensions of telephone, audio Modem,  
and IP dialer, and make the detailed records for locating problems in maintenance.  
1.1.1.71  
Connection, Configuration and Commissioning of User End Devices  
1) Connection splitter  
The VDSL service is the traditional voice and data services run on a twisted pair, requiring the installation of  
splitter at the user end to split voice from data. The correct installation of VDSL splitters is a key step in the  
process of VDSL service commissioning.  
The house line should be first connected into the Line port of the VDSL splitter, and all the voice devices should  
be connected to the Phone port of the splitter and VDSL Modem to the Modem port.  
The practice of connecting to any voice devices before the Line port  
of the splitter should be prohibited, or else, Modem cannot work  
normally.  
Note  
The method for correctly connecting the splitter is shown in the figure below:  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-20  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 12-7 Connection of splitters  
Fax machine  
External line  
Splitter  
Telephone  
Extension  
Computer  
Some Modems are in-built with splitters, and the connection of the  
ports can be done as shown in the figure above.  
Note  
2) Connection, configuration and commissioning of Modems  
Confirm the normality of lines and the proper installation of central office terminals, and the Line cables and  
POTS cables having been connected to the distribution frame. Try to make a call for its normal use, if it cannot  
be made or gets line crossed, the wires may be correctly bonded, and should be done again; if the call can be  
normally made, the next is to connect, configure and commission the Modem. Take the Modem of the in-built  
splitter for example, the method is described as follows:  
„
Connect the Modem with the telephone wire, and connect the network cable to the network  
adapter of PC.  
„
„
Complete the related network configuration and subscriber authentication setting.  
Power on the Modem and wait for over ten seconds, and the SYNC indicator of the Modem is  
on, showing that the VDSL link has been established.  
„
Try to access the Internet, if it is possible, it shows the commissioning of VDSL.  
Recording the User Information and Relevant Data  
For the convenience of the later operation maintenance, the user information and the data for the initially  
commissioned line connection. For details, see Table 12-9 and 12-13:  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-21  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Table 12-12 VDSL setting parameters and connection parameter record table  
Set the restraint parameters  
Upstream  
Downstream [ ]  
Upstream  
Downstream [ ]  
Upstream  
Downstream [ ]  
Upstream  
Downstream [ ]  
Upstream  
Downstream [ ]  
Upstream  
Downstream [ ]  
Upstream  
Downstream [ ]  
Upstream  
Downstream [ ]  
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
[ ]  
[ ]  
[ ]  
[ ]  
[ ]  
[ ]  
[ ]  
[ ]  
r1.04  
r2.08  
r4.17  
r8.33  
r10.04  
r12.5  
r16.67  
rom  
on  
Auto-  
adaptation  
mode  
[
off  
[
10M  
100M  
full  
Ethernet rate  
VDSL  
[
Upstream/d  
ownstream  
rate levels  
[
Duplex  
mode.  
[
half  
on  
[
Modem flow  
control  
[
off  
Others:  
Actual connection parameters  
Upstream  
[ ]  
[ ]  
[ ]  
[ ]  
on  
Auto-  
adaptation  
VDSL  
rate  
off  
Upstream/d  
ownstream  
10M  
100M  
Downstrea  
rate  
Ethernet rate  
m rate  
full  
half  
[ ]  
[ ]  
on  
off  
[ ]  
[ ]  
Duplex  
mode  
Modem flow  
control  
Others  
12.2.3.VDSL Line Maintenance  
VDSL Service Common Faults and Handling  
1) Unable to make calls and access the Internet  
„
Confirm the correct and reliable connection of the splitter, VDSL Modem, subscriber terminal  
PC and telephone.  
„
Report the line faults to the 112 test terminal, and check the Internet accessing after  
confirming the telephone service is normal.  
2) Able to make calls but cannot access the Internet  
(1) Confirm the power supply for the VDSL central office terminal is normal.  
The data service is interrupted upon power-off, but the PSTN voice service cannot be affected because the in-  
built splitter uses the passive working mode.  
(2) Check whether the VDSL Link indicators of the ports related to the Modem or VDSL central office terminals is  
in normal status, and if it is normal, you need to confirm it:  
„
The connection between the splitter and the VDSL Modem is reliable and correct.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-22  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
„
„
Whether the line exceeds the recommended distance.  
Whether there are wires other than copper wires in the line, such as iron wires or aluminium  
wires.  
„
Whether there are any parallels of long distance in the line.  
(3) Check whether the Ethernet LINK indicator of VDSL Modem is normal, if not, please confirm it:  
„
Check whether the connection between the PC terminal and the network cable of the VDSL  
Modem.  
„
„
Check whether the used network cables are correct or they are parallels.  
Check whether the PC network adapter fails or is improperly configured, such as disabled.  
4} Check whether the configuration of the central office terminal is correct.  
„
„
„
„
Whether the VLAN setting is correct.  
Whether the TAGGED mode of the upstream port is matched with the setting of the peer port.  
Whether the negotiation between the upstream port and the peer interface is normal.  
Confirm the consistency of data configuration between the VDSL equipment and the upper  
level equipment.  
(5) Fault location of the common access mode for accessing the Internet  
„
Upon accessing the Internet in the PPPoE dialing mode, check the dialing status, and if the  
connection between the computer and the server is shown as blocked, the physical  
connection and the data configuration between the VDSL equipment and the upper level  
equipment should be checked to ensure the smooth connection; if it does not pass the  
authentication, the correct user name and password should be used.  
„
„
Upon using DHCP to dynamically allocate the IP address, observe whether the subscriber can  
be allocated with the IP address, if not, it shows the incorrect setting of the network adapter.  
For example, the subscriber end has not been set with automatically obtaining the IP address.  
If the subscriber can obtain the IP address and the ping the external IP address, but cannot  
access the Internet yet, check whether the DNS and the setting of the proxy server are  
correct.  
3) Able to access the Internet but the speed is slow  
„
Check the set rate and the actual activation rate of lines, if the activation rate is quite low but  
the transmission distance is not so long, generally it is the problem of lines.  
Check the result of port negotiation, and the ideal negotiation result can be achieved by  
setting the related ports and the subscriber network adapter attributes of the central office  
terminal.  
„
„
Check whether the uplink of the central office terminal is connected to HUB, O/E converter  
and switch, and confirm the correctness of the configuration of these devices.  
1.1.1.72  
Case Analysis  
1) 10M network adapter is connected to Modem, the rate is quite low sometimes.  
Usually, when one end of the line in duplex mode is configured as the full duplex mode and the other end is in  
auto-negotiation mode, the result of the auto-negotiation is half-duplex. The different modes at the two ends  
would lead to low rate.  
Solution: In the case of 10/100M network adapter, two ends are configured as auto-negotiation mode, and they  
can negotiate to the biggest result, that is, 100M/Full; in the case of 10M network adapter, the two ends are  
configured the same mode, that is, 10M/Full or 10M/Half.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-23  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Case Background  
As shown in the figure below, the uplink interface of 3P@C 4450E is connected to PC2, while the downlink  
interface is connected to a Modem and to PC1. The network adapter of PC1 is a 10M network adapter, set as  
10M/Full; PC2 network adapter is in the auto-negotiation mode, set as Auto detect.  
Figure 12-8 Networking diagram  
Fault symptom  
In application, it is found that the rate is very low upon transmitting files with FTP between PC2 and PC1; check  
the status of Modem, and the duplex status of Modem is negotiated to 10M/Half.  
Analysis and troubleshooting:  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
It can be judged that the cause for low rate is the different duplex  
modes at the two ends of the line.  
Configure the duplex modes of Modem and PC1 network adapter as  
the same, that is 10M/Full or 10M/Half.  
Transmit via FTP, and the rate becomes higher. This problem is  
solved.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-24  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 12-25  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 13  
13. Fault Analysis and Solution  
13.1.Problem Location & Information Collection  
In usual cases, the system should be timely checked for problem location and solution when it is abnormal.And  
the information should be collected for relevant personnel for further analysis and solution or serving as the  
reference documents for the system maintenance.  
13.1.1.General Check  
Step 1  
Record the result information of the following information:  
show version [all|<0-15>]: Show the version information of  
all/part of boards or cards inserted in 3P@C 4450E  
show running-time: Show the running time of the system  
show running-config: Show the running configuration of the  
system  
show task: Check whether the task is normally run  
show slab mod: Check the allocation and use of memory  
show slab global: Check the use of memory  
Show sysattack: Check the cases of the system being attacked  
13.1.2.Layer-2 Check  
If some ports on a network segment are blocked, check Layer 2 first:  
Step  
1
show port {[all|<portlist>]}*1  
Check the status of ports, the up/down  
status of ports and the rate, duplex, flow  
control and auto-negotiation mode of  
ports.  
Step  
2
show fdb  
View the software FDB table, and whether  
the MAC address of subscribers and the  
MAC address of the peer router have been  
learnt, and the ports and Vlan Name are  
correct  
Step  
3
show vlan  
Check whether the VLAN configuration of  
software is correct, especially the  
correctness of the VLAN configuration with  
the  
upstream  
equipment,  
including  
whether the connection port is correctly  
added and the tag value is correctly  
configured.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
13.1.3.Layer-3 Check  
If some network segments cannot be used for L3 forwarding, and no problems are found in the L2 check, it can  
be conducted:  
Step 1  
show ip route  
Check the content of the route table, the  
correctness of the route table, and whether  
the configured static route and the  
OSPF/RIP route have been learnt and the  
selection of routes is correct.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
show interface <ifname>  
show ip route cache  
Check whether the related interfaces are  
correctly “upped”.  
Check the correctness of the bottom layer  
host route table.  
13.1.4.Service Check  
If the Modem has not been synchronized, the following check should be done:  
„
„
„
Whether the port has been enabled  
For the ADSL access, check the pvc setting using the show pvc command.  
Check the setting of ports, and view the configuration information using the command, show  
port [<portlist>|all|active] [adsl|vdsl] line-config.  
13.2.Unstable Service due to Wrong Making of Network  
Cables  
Basic Information  
Name of case  
Unstable service due to wrong making of network  
cables  
Product name  
Module type and version  
Software version  
3P@C 4450E  
DS-4TXB  
None  
Since the implementing party lacks sufficient knowledge of making network cables, assuming that the linear  
ordering of the two ends is the same, the actual service cannot be stably run for a long time after being  
commissioned. For the physical problem location of this kind, the engineers should be careful enough and  
improve their understanding of the Ethernet auto-negotiation and basic principles of communication.  
13.2.1.Common Causes  
Mismatched working modes of the interconnected ports between both parties  
Problem of network adapter  
Problem of network  
Problem of port module  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 13-2  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
13.2.2.Processing Procedure  
Step 1  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Step 4  
Show the port configuration of both parties, and check the working  
mode of their ports in actual circumstances  
Check whether there is any wrong statistics in the statistical  
information about ports.  
Check whether the making of network cables meets the EIA/TIA  
568A/B standard. Network cables can be changed if necessary.  
Do the test of changing the upstream electric interface.  
13.2.3.Typical Cases  
1.1.1.73  
Case 1:  
1.1.1.73.1Background  
The phenomenon of intermittent make-break and even no make occurs to the services after interconnection  
when a certain office uses the electrical interface module and the peer equipment of 3P@C 4450E for  
interconnection via the UTP cable.  
1.1.1.73.2Fault symptom  
The phenomenon of intermittent make-break and even no make occurs to the services after interconnection  
when a certain office uses the LAN of DSLAM for interconnection. Check the data configuration and the physical  
connection for correctness, the LINK indicator of the network cable is green. And the problem of upper-layer  
network communication has been excluded.  
1.1.1.73.3Analysis and troubleshooting:  
Step 1  
Check the port modes of the equipment at both ends, they are all the  
10/100M auto-adaptation mode, and the result of the interconnection  
is 100M.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
View the statistical information of the ports, and find a number of CRC  
Error alarms.  
Upon obtaining the consent from the customer, check the network  
cables used for the upper connection, it is found that the network  
cables have not been made according to the standard linear ordering,  
and only the color labels of both parties are made the same.  
After we use the EIA/TIA 568B standard linear ordering mode to  
remake the network cable, the service becomes normal.  
Step 4  
1.1.1.73.4Summary  
A minute problem can often affect the whole work. A low-grade mistake (of not understanding the basic method  
and standard for making the network cables) made by the implementing party leads to a seemingly weird  
problem. Such a problem as intermittent make-break should be solved in basic principles.  
The standard linear ordering of network cables: Yellowish white,  
yellow, greenish white, blue, bluish white, green, brownish white  
and brown, and the same at both ends. This kind of network  
cables can be used for the connection of 10M/100M lines. While  
the practice of making the linear ordering of both ends consistent  
can only applied to the connection of 10M lines. The ports auto-  
Note  
negotiated to 100M, however, is connected using the 10M  
network cable, the packets are inevitably to collide, which leads to  
the intermittent make-break or not make of the service.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 13-3  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 13-4  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 13-5  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 14  
14. Operation Instructions for the Auxiliary  
Devices  
14.1.Use of AC/DC Converter  
In usual cases, 3P@C 4450E uses the DC -48V for power supply. In some application environments that the DC  
power supply is not available, however, AC220V is needed, so the AC/DC converter is the choice. At present,  
the AC/DC converter for choice is the HD4825 rectification module converter.  
1. For the detailed description of HD4825, refer to HD4825  
Rectification Module Use. Here, the connection of power supply for the  
Hammmer10000 AC power supply is the main concern.  
prompt  
2. Other 4825 converters can also be used.  
The procedure of power supply connection in the 3P@C 4450E AC power supply is as follows:  
Step 1  
For 3P@C 4450EV2.00,  
Use the cable connector matched with HD4825, and connect the “+” pole  
(red wire) for the HD4825 DC output with the BGND (black wire) for  
3P@C 4450E DC power input wire connector; connect the “-” pole (black  
wire) for HD4825 DC output with –48V (blue wire) for 3P@C 4450E0 DC  
power input wire connector.  
For 3P@C 4450EV1.00,  
Use the cable connector matched with HD4825, and connect the “+”  
pole (red wire) for the HD4825 DC output with the BGND (black wire)  
for 3P@C 4450E DC power input wire connector; connect the “-” pole  
(black wire) for HD4825 DC output with –48V (red wire) for 3P@C  
4450E0 DC power input wire connector.  
prompt  
Step 2  
Insert the 3P@C 4450E DC power input wire connector into the  
corresponding connector of 3P@C 4450E backplane, and insert the  
HD4825 connector into the DC output port at the back of HD4825. The  
description of 3P@C 4450E backplane power connector ad the DC  
output port at the back of HD4825 is shown in Figure 14-1.  
Connect the 220V AC power supply to HD4825, as shown in Figure 14-  
2.  
Step 3  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure 1-2 Description of 3P@C 4450E backplane power connector and the DC output port at the back of  
HD4825  
AC  
input  
pole  
pole  
Backplane power connector  
DC output port at the back of HD4825  
Figure 1-3 Connection between HD4825 and AC power supply  
DC  
output  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Page 14-2  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of  
SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
APPENDIX  
Common Troubleshooting & Relevant Knowledge  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
A. Diagnosis of Common Faults  
Fault symptom  
All the indicators Power  
Fault cause  
connection  
Solution  
is Check the power cable and the  
are off after power- wrong or power supply is socket.  
on. abnormal.  
LINK indicator is Network  
cable  
or  
is Replace the network cable.  
loosely  
off.  
damaged  
connected.  
The type of network cable  
is wrong or the network  
cable is too long, whose  
length  
exceeds  
the  
permitted range.  
LINK  
flashes  
indicator The wiring of the network Replace the network cable or re-  
cable does not conform to make network cables.  
the standards.  
The network cable is too  
long and its length  
exceeds permitted range.  
The ACT indicator The wiring of the network Replace the network cables or re-  
flashes quickly and cable does not conform to make them.  
the network is the standards.  
blocked.  
The network can The working mode of the Configure the working mode of the  
be pinged, but the switch does not match Ethernet ports so that it matches  
transmission rate that of the Ethernet port the switch or set it in the adaptive  
slows down and at the network terminal.  
working mode.  
packet  
occurs.  
loss  
The network can If  
be pinged at  
certain port, but does not send data after updated, and this phenomenon will  
not when the the network cable is automatically disappear. Or  
network cable is changed to another sending data from this port will  
the  
equipment In about dozens of seconds, the  
a
connected to the port address table of the switch will be  
changed  
another port.  
to network port, the switch also make the switch update its  
will not be able to learn address table immediately.  
the  
new  
address,  
therefore this port will be  
blocked temporarily.  
All ACT indicators Broadcast storm.  
are flashing and  
the network rate  
1.Check if there is loop on the  
network and properly configure the  
network.  
slows down.  
2. Check if any site is sending a  
large  
amount  
of  
broadcast  
packets.  
It stops working The power supply works 1. Check if the power supply is  
after a period of abnormally.  
normal work. It is overheated.  
properly connected and the  
voltage is too low or too high.  
2. Check the surroundings and see  
if the vent is empty and the fans of  
the switch operate normally.  
The system cannot The network connection Check the network connection.  
be  
accessed is incorrect.  
Access the system via the serial  
through Telnet  
The IP address is not port and configure the IP address  
configured.  
properly.  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
B. Glossary  
This section gives a brief description of some terms.  
Terms  
Definition  
Backbone  
The network that serves as the main path for traffic transmission  
between network segments.  
Bandwidth  
10Base-T  
Frequency bandwidth of the network channel, which usually means  
the data transmission capability of the network channel.  
An abbreviated term in IEEE 802.3, which refers to the 10Mbps  
Ethernet over Category-3 or better twisted pair based on  
Manchester signal coding.  
100Base-TX  
100Base-FX  
1000Base-LX  
1000Base-SX  
An abbreviated term in IEEE 802.3, which refers to the 100Mbps  
fast Ethernet over two Category-5 twisted pairs based on 4B/5B  
signal coding.  
An abbreviated terminology as given in IEEE 802.3, indicating 100  
Mbps fast Ethernet over optical fiber cables based on 4B/5B signal  
coding.  
An abbreviated terminology as given in IEEE 802.3, indicating 1000  
Mbps Ethernet over the long wavelength optical fibers based on  
8B/10B signal coding.  
An abbreviated terminology as given in IEEE 802.3, indicating  
1000Mbps Ethernet over short wavelength optical fibers based on  
8B/10B signal coding.  
Auto  
negotiation  
The auto negotiation mode means the interface automatically  
adjusts its speed to the highest public level, that is, the fastest  
possible speed and duplex mode between the two ends of the line,  
according to the connection rate and duplex mode of the equipment  
on the other end.  
Full-duplex  
Semi-duplex  
Collision  
A communication method, which permits simultaneously receiving  
and sending data.  
A communication method, which only permits either data sending or  
receiving at a moment.  
Normal event on the Ethernet in semi-duplex working mode, which  
indicates two or more sites access the same channel  
simultaneously.  
Broadcast  
storm  
A large amount of broadcast frames on the Ethernet causes network  
congestion and thus leads to network failure.  
RJ-45  
MDI  
A kind of 8-pin module connector for twisted pair links.  
Medium-related interface, which is the name of the connector for  
establishing physical and electrical connections between the  
transceiver and medium segments.  
MDIX  
Crossed medium-related interface, which sends the signal from one  
equipment to the signal-receiving side of the other equipment and  
vise versa.  
SNMP  
STP  
Simple Network Management Protocol  
Spanning Tree Protocol  
VLAN  
Virtual LAN  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
C. Fiber-related Knowledge  
The center of an optical fiber is a glass core for optical transmission. The core is surrounded by a layer of glass  
envelope, whose refractive index is lower than that of the core to keep the optical fiber within the core. Out of the  
glass envelope is a layer of thin plastic sheath to protect the envelope. The high reliability, transmission quality  
and gradual adoption of new technologies in design and manufacturing make the optical fiber cables have an  
even wider application range.  
C.1 Multi-Mode and Single-Mode Optical Fiber Cables  
The optical fiber system can be divided into two categories according to the optical transmission mode: multi-  
mode and single-mode. A single-mode optical fiber cable has a very small core (4 um to 10 um) and can only  
transmit signals in single mode at a given wavelength. Its transmission bandwidth is wide and the transmission  
capacity is quite large. You can tell single-mode fiber cables from multi-mode fiber cables easily based on the  
size of their cores.  
Multi-mode fibers can support multiple transmission modes on a given wavelength. In multi-mode transmission,  
different modes of optical signals are transmitted at different rates through the same fiber. This can result in  
phase difference, which, in turn, causes transmission distortion. And therefore, the frequency band that a multi-  
mode optical fiber can provide is restricted. Two specifications are available now for the cores of multi-mode  
optical fibers: 62.5mm and 50mm. In ISO/IEC 11801, both the two modes are recognized transmission media.  
C.2 Wavelength range of the optical fiber  
Optical wave bands adopted for optical fiber cabling: 800nm to 900nm short wave band, 1250nm to 1350nm  
long wave band and 1500nm to 1600nm long wave band.  
In these bands, the optical fiber performs best at the central wavelength of each band. Therefore the operating  
wavelength of the multimode optical fiber is 850nm or 1300nm and the operating wavelength of the single mode  
optical fiber is 1310nm or 1550nm.  
C.3 Optical Fiber Connector  
The optical connector, a demountable device, is defined by International Telecommunication Union (ITU) as fiber  
optic passive component that connects stably but not permanently two or more optical fibers. In March 1992,  
Study Group VI of CCITT (Consultative Committee for International Telegraphy and Telephony) formally adopted  
the definition. The optical connector is an indispensable passive device in optical communication system and  
makes the demountable connection of optical channels possible. The optical connector has many kinds. For  
example:  
„
„
„
„
FC optical connector, round and threaded  
ST optical connector, plug-in and round-head  
SC optical connector, square-head  
MT-RJ square optical connector capable of both receiving and sending  
The following is the appearance of the SC connector and MT-RJ connector, as shown in Figure C-1 and C-2:  
Figure C-1 Appearance of the SC connector  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM 3P@C  
Figure C-2 Appearance of the RJ connector  
3P@C Installation Manual  
Reproduction and communication in any form prohibited without the written permission of SAGEM SA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAGEM SA may, at any time and without notice, make changes or improvements to the products and services offered and/or cease producing or commercialising  
them. The SAGEM logo and trademark are the property of SAGEM SA.  
SAGEM SA Networks Division  
Phone +33 1 53 23 18 16 Fax +33 1 58 12 42 95  
www.sagem.com  
Head office : Le Ponant de Paris - 27, rue Leblanc - 75512 PARIS CEDEX 15 - FRANCE  
Société anonyme à directoire et conseil de surveillance au capital de 35 500 000 e - 562 082 909 R.C.S PARIS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Quasar Fax Machine PAX405 User Guide
Radica Games Handheld Game System 75008 User Guide
Radio Shack Universal Remote 61 2677C User Guide
Reliable Sewing Machine XD 510L User Guide
Rotel Stereo Amplifier RB 1552 User Guide
Samsung Clothes Dryer DV218AEW User Guide
Sanus Systems Indoor Furnishings HF1 User Guide
Scag Power Equipment Lawn Mower GC STT User Guide
Seagate Computer Drive ST9808211AB User Guide
Sebo Vacuum Cleaner FELIX User Guide